292
User Manual Second edition

enterprise manual 1c

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: enterprise manual 1c

User Manual

Second edition

1С:E

nt

Er

pr

isE

8.2

Use

r M

anual

Page 2: enterprise manual 1c

ENTIRE COPYRIGHT TO SOFTWARE

AND DOCUMENTATION BELONGS TO 1C Company

By purchasing 1С:Enterprise software system

you hereby agree to protect rights of 1C Company

and refrain from making copies of the software

and documentation without prior written permission from 1C Company.

© 1C, LLC, 1996–20121C Company, Moscow, 123056, P.O. 64Sales Department: 21, Seleznevskaya st.,Phone: +7 (495) 737-92-57,Fax: +7 (495) 681-44-07,E-mail: [email protected]: www.1c.ru/eng, www.1c-dn.com

Software Development Group: A. Alekseev, A. Bezborodov, D. Beskorovainov, P. Vasilets, A. Vinogradov, A. Volkov, N. Evgrafov, I. Golshtein, E. Gornostayev, G. Damie, O. Derut, D. Zaretsky, D. Ivashov, S. Kopienko, N. Korsakov, S. Kravtchenko, A. Lakutin, M. Leybovitch, G. Leontyev, A. Lekhan, A. Medvedev, E. Mitroshkin, S. Murzin, S. Nuraliev, M. Otstavnov, D. Pavlenko, A. Plyakin, A. Rukin, D. Rusanov, D. Sluzhbin, A. Smirnov, P. Solodky, V. Sosnovsky, A. Toporkov, V. Tunegov, V. Philippov, V. Cheremisinov, P. Chikov, A. Chicherin, A. Shevtchenko.

Documentation: V. Baidakov, V. Dranishchev, E. Korolkova, A. Krayushkin, I. Kuznetsov, M. Lavrov, A. Monichev, A. Plyakin, M. Radchenko.

Technical Support Group: O. Akulova, S. Alekseeva, O. Bagrova, O. Baklushina, A. Garifullina, V. Davydova, O. Dmitryenko, L. Ermakova, M. Ershova, U. Zhestkov, O. Zavalskaya, N. Zayavlina, M. Zvonilov, M. Ivanova, G. Korobka, U. Lavrova, S. Lepeshkina, S. Mazurin, S. Markov, J. Misan, A. Pavlikov, I. Panin, O. Pekhtereva, S. Postnova, A. Prokurovsky, E. Romanova, G. Stepanenko, N. Stepanov, T. Tokareva, E. Shirokova.

QA Group: T. Akulova, A. Andriyanova, E. Antonova, M. Gubko, B. Ziatdinov, A. Kapralova, S. Karasev, I. Karelin, A. Lapin, E. Litvinenko, E. Medvedev, O. Reader, E. Sitosenko, E. Smirnova, E. Stetsenko, G. Fadeeva, S. Khrisanova, N. Shargunova.

Book Title: 1С:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual. Second editionPublication Number: 82.104.02Publication Date:

Page 3: enterprise manual 1c

TECHNICAL SUPPORT LINE

Registered users can receive technical support from 1C Company or authorized 1C partners. To complete your registration, fill out the registration form and mail it to the 1C partner through which you have purchased the product. The address is printed on the registration form.Refer to the software registration card for the telephone number and e-mail address of the technical support service. When you dial the hot line, ensure that you are not far from your computer and you have this guide and your registration card with you. Be prepared to provide the support representative with the brand and technical specifications of your computer and printer. When you dial the hot line, you will be connected with a technical specialist. Be ready to provide the name of your company, your software version number (it can be found on the software distribution CD and on your registration card) and other registration information. The information that you provide will be verified against the registration form that you sent out. The technical support specialist might attempt to reproduce your situation on their computer. They might provide the solution immediately or consult software devel-opers. The log of all support calls is maintained, so when calling about a previous issue you can refer to the date and time of your previous call.

WE ARE ALWAYS HERE TO HELP YOU!

Page 4: enterprise manual 1c

4 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 5: enterprise manual 1c

Contents

Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 13Structure of the Manual ........................................................................................................ 13What You Need To Know .................................................................................................... 14Books Included in the Documentation ................................................................................. 15

Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise 8.2 Distribution Kit ..........................................15About 1C:Enterprise 8 Page ................................................................................................. 161C:Enterprise 8 Web Site ..................................................................................................... 161C:Developer Network ......................................................................................................... 16

Chapter 1. About 1C:Enterprise ........................................................................................ 17Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update.................................................................... 19

2.1. Software Installation ...................................................................................................... 192.1.1. Platform Installation ...............................................................................................202.1.2. Selecting Interface Language ..................................................................................23

2.2. Configuration Installation .............................................................................................. 232.3. Obtaining a License ....................................................................................................... 24

Chapter 3. Getting Started .................................................................................................. 253.1. Application Startup ........................................................................................................ 253.2. Login ............................................................................................................................. 25

3.2.1. Web Client Startup..................................................................................................263.2.2. Connection Speed Selection ...................................................................................26

3.3. Adding an Infobase ....................................................................................................... 273.3.1. Creating an Infobase ...............................................................................................27

Chapter 4. Software Interface ............................................................................................ 314.1. Main Window ................................................................................................................ 31

4.1.1. Desktop ...................................................................................................................334.1.2. Sections Panel .........................................................................................................344.1.3. Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................344.1.4. Action Panel ............................................................................................................354.1.5. Information Panel ...................................................................................................37

4.2. Auxiliary Window ......................................................................................................... 37

Page 6: enterprise manual 1c

6 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

4.2.1. Auxiliary Window Navigation ................................................................................384.2.2. Form Command Bar ...............................................................................................38

4.3. General Workflow ......................................................................................................... 394.4. Windowing system operation on multiple monitors ..................................................... 394.5. Working in the Tab Mode ............................................................................................. 40

4.5.1. Tabs .........................................................................................................................404.6. The Functions Menu ...................................................................................................... 424.7. Panels Setup .................................................................................................................. 43

Chapter 5. Operation in Forms .......................................................................................... 455.1. General Techniques of Working with Forms ................................................................ 455.2. Dragging operations ...................................................................................................... 465.3. Fields ............................................................................................................................. 47

5.3.1. Text Box .................................................................................................................475.3.2. Check box ...............................................................................................................515.3.3. Radio Button ...........................................................................................................51

5.4. Progress Bar .................................................................................................................. 525.5. Slider ............................................................................................................................ 525.6. Hyperlink ....................................................................................................................... 525.7. Button ............................................................................................................................ 525.8. Table .............................................................................................................................. 535.9. Groups ........................................................................................................................... 55

5.9.1. Command Bar .........................................................................................................555.9.2. Pages .......................................................................................................................56

5.10. Chart ............................................................................................................................ 565.11. Text Document Field ................................................................................................... 565.12. HTML Document Field ............................................................................................... 565.13. Graphical Schema Field .............................................................................................. 575.14. Picture Field ................................................................................................................ 585.15. Spreadsheet Document Field ....................................................................................... 585.16. The Formatted Document Field .................................................................................. 605.17. Managing a Form and Saving Settings ........................................................................ 625.18. Specific Features of Some Forms ................................................................................ 63

Chapter 6. Lists .................................................................................................................... 656.1. Viewing a List ............................................................................................................... 66

6.1.1. Hierarchical Lists ....................................................................................................666.2. Creating a List Item ....................................................................................................... 69

6.2.1. Creating a Folder in a List ......................................................................................706.2.2. Copying a List Item ................................................................................................70

6.3. Editing List Items .......................................................................................................... 706.3.1. List Rearrangement .................................................................................................716.3.2. Selecting a Value from a List .................................................................................716.3.3. Search in Lists .........................................................................................................73

6.4. List Customization ........................................................................................................ 746.4.1. Filter ........................................................................................................................756.4.2. Sorting .....................................................................................................................75

Page 7: enterprise manual 1c

7Contents

6.4.3. Group ......................................................................................................................766.4.4. Conditional Appearance .........................................................................................776.4.5. Visibility Interval ....................................................................................................77

6.5. Print List ........................................................................................................................ 78Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types ............................................................... 79

7.1. Item Numbering ............................................................................................................ 797.2. Adding an Element Based On ....................................................................................... 797.3. Deleting (Marking for Deletion) an Item (Folder) ....................................................... 807.4. Working with Data from External Sources ................................................................... 807.5. Print Form of an Object ................................................................................................ 817.6. Multiuser Operation ...................................................................................................... 827.7. Documents and Document Journals .............................................................................. 82

7.7.1. Viewing Document Journal ....................................................................................837.7.2. Adding a New Document from the Document Journal ..........................................837.7.3. Document Date and Time .......................................................................................847.7.4. Posting a Document ................................................................................................847.7.5. Unpostable Documents ...........................................................................................857.7.6. Viewing Document Register Records .....................................................................85

7.8. Business Processes ........................................................................................................ 867.8.1. List of Business Processes ......................................................................................867.8.2. List of Tasks............................................................................................................877.8.3. Executing a Task .....................................................................................................88

Chapter 8. Reports ............................................................................................................... 898.1. Report Setup .................................................................................................................. 908.2. Report Variants .............................................................................................................. 928.3. Working with Reports ................................................................................................... 92

8.3.1. Using Quick Settings ..............................................................................................948.3.2. Settings....................................................................................................................94

8.4. Working with Report Details ........................................................................................ 99Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant ............................................................................... 105

9.1. General Report Customization .................................................................................... 1069.2. Changing Report Structure .......................................................................................... 106

9.2.1. Customization of Report Structure Item ...............................................................1099.2.2. Setting Elements ...................................................................................................109

9.3. Selecting Settings Items .............................................................................................. 121Chapter 10. Service Features ............................................................................................ 125

10.1. Links .......................................................................................................................... 12510.2. Favorites .................................................................................................................... 126

10.2.1. Favorites Setup ...................................................................................................12710.3. History ....................................................................................................................... 12710.4. All Functions ............................................................................................................. 12810.5. Notifications .............................................................................................................. 12910.6. Messages ................................................................................................................... 12910.7. Status of a Lengthy Process ....................................................................................... 130

Page 8: enterprise manual 1c

8 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

10.8. Calculator .................................................................................................................. 13110.8.1. Working with Clipboard .....................................................................................133

10.9. Calendar ..................................................................................................................... 13410.10. Files Comparison ..................................................................................................... 136

10.10.1. Text Files Comparison ......................................................................................13610.10.2. Spreadsheet Documents Comparison ...............................................................138

10.11. Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 139Chapter 11. Software Configuration ................................................................................ 141

11.1. Interface ..................................................................................................................... 14111.1.1. Desktop ...............................................................................................................14111.1.2. Sections Panel .....................................................................................................14211.1.3. Navigation Panel .................................................................................................14311.1.4. Action Panel ........................................................................................................14411.1.5. System Commands Area of the Main and Auxiliary Windows ..........................145

11.2. Form Setup ................................................................................................................ 14711.2.1. Sample Form Setup .............................................................................................149

11.3. System Options .......................................................................................................... 15311.4. Window Layout Management ................................................................................... 154

11.4.1. Windows of Text and Spreadsheet Documents ..................................................15511.4.2. Restoring Window Position ................................................................................155

Chapter 12. Getting Help .................................................................................................. 15712.1. Help Window ............................................................................................................ 157

12.1.1. Viewing Help Information ..................................................................................15812.1.2. Searching for Help Information ..........................................................................15912.1.3. Format of Search Expressions ............................................................................16112.1.4. Printing Descriptions ..........................................................................................163

12.2. About 1C:Enterprise Window ................................................................................... 163Chapter 13. Using Web Client .......................................................................................... 165

13.1. Web Client Startup .................................................................................................... 16513.1.1. Web Client Window ...........................................................................................16613.1.2. Specific Features of Printing ...............................................................................16713.1.3. Operations with Files ..........................................................................................167

13.2. Specific Features of the Web Client .......................................................................... 16713.2.1. Saving Documents ..............................................................................................16713.2.2. Operations with Tabs ..........................................................................................16813.2.3. Operations with Windows ..................................................................................16813.2.4. Other Specific Features .......................................................................................16813.2.5. Working on iPad .................................................................................................172

13.3. Microsoft Internet Explorer Setup ............................................................................. 17313.3.1. File System Extension Setup ..............................................................................174

13.4. Mozilla Firefox Setup ................................................................................................ 17413.4.1. File System Extension Setup ..............................................................................17513.4.2. Language Settings ...............................................................................................175

13.5. Google Chrome Setup ............................................................................................... 17613.6. Safari Setup ............................................................................................................... 177

Page 9: enterprise manual 1c

9Contents

Chapter 14. Slow Connection Mode ................................................................................ 179Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode ........................................................................ 181

15.1. Interface ..................................................................................................................... 18115.2. Operations Menu ....................................................................................................... 182

15.2.1. List Customization ..............................................................................................18215.2.2. Reports ...............................................................................................................18715.2.3. Report Setup .......................................................................................................189

15.3. Service Features ........................................................................................................ 19015.3.1. Options Setup ......................................................................................................19015.3.2. Toolbars ..............................................................................................................19215.3.3. Toolbar Types .....................................................................................................19215.3.4. Toolbar Management ..........................................................................................19315.3.5. Temporary Lock .................................................................................................194

15.4. Setting User Options ................................................................................................. 19515.5. Saving Event Log ..................................................................................................... 19515.6. Window Layout Management ................................................................................... 195

15.6.1. Window Panel .....................................................................................................19515.6.2. Service Windows ................................................................................................197

15.7. Window State (Layout Mode) ................................................................................... 198Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language ...................................... 201

1.1. Operations with Numbers ............................................................................................ 2021.2. Operations with Rows ................................................................................................. 2031.3. Comparison Operations ............................................................................................... 2041.4. Aggregate Functions .................................................................................................... 2061.5. Other Operations ......................................................................................................... 2091.6. Functions ..................................................................................................................... 211

Appendix 2. Text Editor .................................................................................................... 2232.1. Editing Text Documents .............................................................................................. 2232.2. Creating and Opening a Text Document ..................................................................... 2232.3. Selecting an Extension for a Text Document .............................................................. 2242.4. Inputting and Editing Text .......................................................................................... 224

2.4.1. Moving the Cursor ................................................................................................2242.4.2. Go to a Text Line ..................................................................................................2242.4.3. Using Bookmarks .................................................................................................2242.4.4. Selecting Blocks of Text .......................................................................................2252.4.5. Operations on Selected Blocks .............................................................................2252.4.6. Deleting Text ........................................................................................................2252.4.7. Inserting a Page Break ..........................................................................................2252.4.8. Undo Changes .......................................................................................................2252.4.9. Search and Replace ...............................................................................................2262.4.10. Saving a Text Document .....................................................................................2272.4.11. Printing a Text Document ...................................................................................2272.4.12. Closing Text Documents ....................................................................................228

Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor .................................................................... 2293.1. Spreadsheet Documents in 1C:Enterprise .................................................................. 229

Page 10: enterprise manual 1c

10 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.2. Operations with Spreadsheet Documents .................................................................... 2303.3. Creating and Opening Spreadsheet Documents .......................................................... 2303.4. Saving Spreadsheet Documents .................................................................................. 2303.5. Closing Spreadsheet Documents ................................................................................. 2313.6. Viewing Spreadsheet Documents ................................................................................ 231

3.6.1. Names ...................................................................................................................2333.6.2. Cell Text Input ......................................................................................................234

3.7. Selecting Cells, Rows, and Columns in a Spreadsheet ............................................... 2353.8. Search and Replace ..................................................................................................... 2363.9. Changing Row Height and Column Width ................................................................. 2373.10. Moving and Copying Cells ........................................................................................ 2383.11. Adding and Deleting Cells ........................................................................................ 2403.12. Split Cells .................................................................................................................. 2413.13. Specifying Varying Column Widths ......................................................................... 2413.14. Hiding and Showing Rows and Columns .................................................................. 2423.15. Merge Cells ............................................................................................................... 2433.16. Working with Named Areas of Spreadsheet Documents .......................................... 243

3.16.1. Creating a Named Area .......................................................................................2443.16.2. Named Area Viewing Mode ..............................................................................2443.16.3. Deleting a Named Area ......................................................................................2443.16.4. Resizing Named Areas .......................................................................................244

3.17. Working with Spreadsheet Document Groups .......................................................... 2443.17.1. Creating a Group .................................................................................................2453.17.2. Viewing Groups ..................................................................................................2453.17.3. Deleting a Group .................................................................................................2463.17.4. Resizing Groups. Nested and External Groups ..................................................246

3.18. Using Graphical Objects ........................................................................................... 2473.18.1. Inserting Graphical Objects ................................................................................2483.18.2. Linking Graphical Objects ..................................................................................2493.18.3. Selecting and Resizing Graphical Objects ..........................................................2493.18.4. Aligning Groups of Graphical Objects ...............................................................2503.18.5. Setting the Graphical Object Group Size ............................................................2503.18.6. Moving and Copying Graphical Objects ............................................................2513.18.7. Changing Graphical Object Order ......................................................................2513.18.8. Deleting Graphical Objects .................................................................................2513.18.9. Grouping Graphical Objects ...............................................................................2513.18.10. Graphical Object Names ...................................................................................2523.18.11. Working with Charts .........................................................................................2523.18.12. Creating Charts .................................................................................................2523.18.13. Chart Data Area ................................................................................................253

3.19. Working with OLE Objects ....................................................................................... 2543.20. Working with Spreadsheets in "Template" Mode ..................................................... 2543.21. General Principles of Template Design ..................................................................... 2543.22. Print Setup ................................................................................................................. 2563.23. Headers and Footers .................................................................................................. 2563.24. Pagination .................................................................................................................. 256

Page 11: enterprise manual 1c

11Contents

3.25. Auto Repetition of Rows and Columns ..................................................................... 2573.26. Specify Print Area ..................................................................................................... 2573.27. Page Setup ................................................................................................................. 2573.28. Printing a Spreadsheet Document ............................................................................. 2583.29. Editing Spreadsheet and Cell Properties ................................................................... 259

3.29.1. Spreadsheet Document Properties ......................................................................2593.29.2. Specifying a Background Picture for a Sheet .....................................................2613.29.3. Print Area Definition ..........................................................................................2623.29.4. Defining Repeating Rows and Columns .............................................................263

3.30. Cell Properties ........................................................................................................... 2633.30.1. Main Property Category ......................................................................................2633.30.2. Position Property Category .................................................................................2643.30.3. Appearance Property Category ...........................................................................264

Appendix 4. HTML Document Editor ............................................................................. 2674.1. Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 2674.2. Creating HTML Document ......................................................................................... 2674.3. Saving .......................................................................................................................... 2674.4. Editing ......................................................................................................................... 2674.5. Entering Text ............................................................................................................... 2674.6. Formatting Text ........................................................................................................... 2684.7. Inserting and Editing a Table ..................................................................................... 2684.8. Inserting a Picture ........................................................................................................ 2684.9. Label ............................................................................................................................ 2694.10. Links .......................................................................................................................... 2694.11. Bookmarks ................................................................................................................. 2704.12. Line ............................................................................................................................ 2704.13. Formatting HTML Documents .................................................................................. 2704.14. Editing in HTML Format .......................................................................................... 2704.15. Viewing the Results ................................................................................................... 270

Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor ............................................................................ 2715.1. Editing a Schema ......................................................................................................... 2715.2. Inserting Items into a Graphical Schema .................................................................... 271

5.2.1. Copying Graphical Schema Items ........................................................................2725.3. Layout Grid ................................................................................................................. 2725.4. Actions on Selected Group of Controls ....................................................................... 273

5.4.1. Managing Alignment and Distribution of Schema Items .....................................2735.4.2. Distributing Schema Items....................................................................................2745.4.3. Setting Sizes .........................................................................................................2745.4.4. Order of Items .......................................................................................................2755.4.5. Scale ......................................................................................................................2755.4.6. Scrolling a Graphical Schema ...............................................................................2755.4.7. Print and Print Preview .........................................................................................275

5.5. Graphical Schema Properties ...................................................................................... 2765.5.1. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................2765.5.2. Edit Property Category .........................................................................................276

Page 12: enterprise manual 1c

12 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.6. Graphical Schema Items .............................................................................................. 2765.6.1. Main Property Category ........................................................................................2775.6.2. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................2775.6.3. Characteristics Property Category ........................................................................2775.6.4. Location Property Category ..................................................................................2785.6.5. Decorative Line ....................................................................................................2785.6.6. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................2785.6.7. Characteristics Property Category ........................................................................2795.6.8. Decoration .............................................................................................................2795.6.9. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................2795.6.10. Point of Action ....................................................................................................2795.6.11. Addressing Property Category ............................................................................2805.6.12. Fork Point ...........................................................................................................2805.6.13. Condition Point ...................................................................................................2805.6.14. End Point.............................................................................................................2805.6.15. Start Point ...........................................................................................................2805.6.16. Joining Point .......................................................................................................2805.6.17. Embedded Business Process Point .....................................................................2815.6.18. Processing Point ..................................................................................................2815.6.19. Transition Choice Point ......................................................................................2815.6.20. Transition Property Category ..............................................................................281

Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor ...................................................................... 2836.1. Creating a Geographical Schema ................................................................................ 2856.2. Saving a Geographical Schema ................................................................................... 2856.3. Customizing a Geographical Schema .......................................................................... 285

6.3.1. Legend Elements Setup ........................................................................................2876.3.2. Object Properties ...................................................................................................288

6.4. Geographical Schema Properties ................................................................................. 2896.4.1. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................2896.4.2. Series Property Category ......................................................................................290

6.5. Geographical Schema Title Properties ........................................................................ 2906.5.1. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................290

6.6. Geographical Schema Legend Properties .................................................................... 2916.6.1. Appearance Property Category .............................................................................291

6.7. Text Search and Replace ............................................................................................. 292

Page 13: enterprise manual 1c

IntroduCtIon

This manual (hereinafter, Manual) is intended for 1C:Enterprise application users. It describes the basic concepts and features that are common for all 1C:Enterprise applications. For information about application-specific features, consult the manual delivered with the application.For information about development and administration of 1C:Enterprise applica-tions, consult the following manuals: "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide" and "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide".

Structure of the Manual

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the 1C:Enterprise platform.Chapter 2 describes 1C:Enterprise installation and update.Chapter 3 describes 1C:Enterprise application startup. Chapter 4 describes common application interface elements.Chapter 5 describes operations with forms.Chapter 6 describes operations with lists. Chapter 7 describes operations with various data types.Chapters 8 and 9 describe operations with reports and report variants.Chapter 10 describes service capabilities of the platform: references, favorites, history, built-in calculator, and so on.Chapter 11 describes customization of the interface, forms, and system parameters.Chapter 12 describes operations with help.Chapter 13 describes operations with the web client.Chapter 14 describes working with the platform in the slow connection mode.

Page 14: enterprise manual 1c

14 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Chapter 15 describes working with the platform in the "ordinary" application mode.Appendix 1 describes the data composition system expression language, which is used for creating custom report fields.The next Appendixes describe other 1C:Enterprise built-in editors. Appendix 2 describes the text editor; Appendix 3 covers the spreadsheet editor used to view, edit, and print output forms of documents and reports; Appendix 4 is dedicated to the HTML document editor; Appendix 5 describes the graphical schema editor; and Appendix 6 covers the geographical schema editor.

Note TypesThe Manual includes the following note types:

TIp � – an alternative method that you can use.nOTE � – additional information.IMpORTAnT � ! – information that is important for correct operation of the platform.

ConventionsKeys: The key names are emphasized, for example: Enter, Esc, Del."Cursor control keys" refers to the arrow keys. They are referred individually as Up Arrow, Down Arrow, Right Arrow, and Left Arrow.Keyboard shortcuts: The shortcut key combos are given as follows: Ctrl + F3. Buttons: The button names in forms or dialog boxes, as well as bookmark names, are given without quotation marks, for example: OK, Cancel, Delete.Action description: You can perform all actions described in the Manual (such as opening document journals, entering documents, generating reports, and so on) by selecting menu items (in the main window, an active window, or a context menu). In most cases you can perform the same actions using the command bar buttons. When selecting a menu item, pay attention to the icon to the left of the item name. The command bar button with the same icon performs the same action.To select an item, usually you have to left-click it once or twice.

What You need to KnoW

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operating system of the computer where 1C:Enterprise is installed, and that you have the basic skills required to work with this operating system.You must be familiar with the following concepts: the Start menu, windows, menus, standard dialog boxes, operating system clipboard, and the Control Panel.

Page 15: enterprise manual 1c

15Introduction

If you have not completely mastered these concepts, it is recommended that you to refer to the operating system documentation.

BooKS Included In the docuMentatIon

The documentation package includes the following books:"1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual". Describes the basic concepts and features �that are common for all 1C:Enterprise applications. "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide". Describes how to customize applications �to reflect the accounting procedures in a specific company, as well as how to develop new applications."1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide". Describes 1C:Enterprise administra- �tion, including features related to building client-server systems. "1С:Enterprise 8.2. Client-Server. Administrator Guide". Describes �1C:Enterprise installation and operation with client-server infobase versions.

The syntax of the 1C:Enterprise script and query language is described in "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide". The full object model description is included in the distribution kit in the electronic form (in the Designer help topics and in the Syntax Assistant).

important!

The distribution kit for a specific product may not include some of the books.

Text Files Included in the 1C:Enterprise 8.2 Distribution Kit

The distribution kit includes electronic documents that include the descriptions of installation and update procedures, as well as the list of features added in this version. They are copied to the hard disk during 1C:Enterprise installation.These documents are located in the directory with 1C:Enterprise installation files, in the \docs\en subdirectory. If you do not change the default installation path, they are copied to C:\Program Files\1cv82\VersionNumber\docs\en. The VersionNumber stands for the 1C:Enterprise version number. For example, this is how the path looks for version 8.2.9.300: C:\Program Files\1cv82\8.2.9.300\docs\en.The file V8Update.htm contains the list of changes as compared to previous plat-form versions, and update instructions.The file Files\1cv82\VersionNumber\licenses\1CEnterprise_en.htm contains the 1C:Enterprise license agreement.The following directory contains the license agreements for third-party components used in the platform: C:\Program Files\1cv82\VersionNumber\licenses\3rd_party.

Page 16: enterprise manual 1c

16 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

aBout 1c:enterprISe 8 page

For links to frequently used 1C:Enterprise resources, see http://v8.1c.ru/eng/AllInfo/. This web page contains links intended for the following groups of users:

Applications users, �Applications developers, �1C Company partners. �

1c:enterprISe 8 WeB SIte

For information on the 1C:Enterprise 8 technological platform and on the standard applications developed by 1C Company, see http://v8.1c.ru/eng.

1c:developer netWorK

1C:Developer Network at http://www.1c-dn.com helps developers to create business solutions based on the 1C:Enterprise platform. The 1C:Developer Network library at http://1c-dn.com/library/what_is_1c_enter-prise/ has information for both novice and experienced developers, and provides you with everything needed to create a complete business solution from scratch.

Page 17: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 1

about 1C:enterprIse

1C:Enterprise is a universal software system that is intended to automate accounting, planning, and management tasks of enterprises as well as to solve personal tasks. 1C:Enterprise operation is divided into two separate processes: setup (configura-tion development) and the user operation itself related to accounting or processing various calculations.Configuration development. At the 1C:Enterprise configuration development stage, an application is developed in compliance with the features of a specific enterprise. This is when the structure of objects and their display are defined, roles are created for various levels of users and also when the interface is described. To learn more about configuration development, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide".Besides, this is also the stage when various administrative actions can be carried out. These actions may include user list maintenance, infobase parameters setup, event log customization, configuration update, etc.User operation. A user works with the infobase when the software is launched in the 1C:Enterprise mode. This is when the software actually operates to accomplish its goals: data input, generation of various reports, various scheduled calculations, etc.A user works with the data that have their structure defined in the configuration. At that the user relies on the algorithms created during configuration development.This Manual provides a general description of the procedures used to operate 1C:Enterprise in different modes: data display and input, obtaining reports, interface customization, etc. The configuration description itself can explain the specifics of operations with individual objects that depend on the configuration. In this case you can use the help mode to learn the explanations (see the chapter "Getting Help").

Page 18: enterprise manual 1c

18 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 19: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 2

software InstallatIon and update

This chapter briefly covers 1C:Enterprise installation and update procedures and installation of configurations.

2.1. SoftWare InStallatIon

1C:Enterprise includes the components designed to develop and use solutions (configurations) for accounting and enterprise business activities automation, as well as for personal goals.1C:Enterprise installation can be primary, when the selected components are installed completely, or secondary, if you need to modify, reinstall, or uninstall some or all of the system components.An installer is launched automatically when a disk inserted into a drive. If autorun is disabled on a computer, you should run autorun.exe.

Fig. 1. Installer

Page 20: enterprise manual 1c

20 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The installer prompts you to select installation mode: quick installation and launch or custom installation (see fig. 1). When you select Quick Installation and Launch (recommended), the installer will install the 1C:Enterprise platform and configuration available on the disk to the default directories.When you select Custom installation or when quick installation is not available for a specific distribution kit, the installer will prompt you to specify the component to be installed.

Fig. 2. Custom installation menu

2.1.1. platform Installation

Once the preliminary actions are completed, an installer Welcome screen will be displayed.

Fig. 3. Installer welcome screen

Page 21: enterprise manual 1c

21Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update

Click Next > to proceed with installation.The installer proceeds in various manners depending on whether 1C:Enterprise is already installed or if it is the initial installation.The installer prompts you to select the components for 1C:Enterprise installation.Specify an installation directory Folder: where the selected components will be copied to.You may use the installation directory name suggested by the launched or enter another name by clicking Browse.When you select the components and specify a directory, click Next > to continue with the installation.During initial installation, by default the launcher suggests to install the component named 1C:Enterprise. This component includes all the platform features that are required to work on a user computer: thick and thin clients and configuration devel-opment and administration tools.

Fig. 4. Selecting installation of the 1C:Enterprise basic components

Click Next > if you do not need any specific customization of the installation.

Page 22: enterprise manual 1c

22 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If you only need to install the thin client to connect to an infobase on a server or on a web server, select 1C:Enterprise – thin client.

Fig. 5. Selecting installation of thin client components for client-server mode

Click Next > to proceed with installation.If you only need to install the thin client to work with a file infobase, select 1C:Enterprise – thin client, file mode version from the list of components.

Fig. 6. Thin client installation for file operation mode

Page 23: enterprise manual 1c

23Chapter 2. Software Installation and Update

2.1.2. Selecting Interface language

At the next step the installer will prompt you to select a default interface language.

Fig. 7. Selecting default interface language

Specify an interface to use as the default one.Click Next > to proceed with installation.The installer copies files and creates program folders and shortcuts. Next the installer will prompt you to install the HASP Device Driver security driver.

IMPORTANT!

The driver needs to be installed if a dongle will be plugged into a USB port of this computer.

When you click Next >, the final state of the installer is displayed. Clicking Finish completes 1C:Enterprise installation.

2.2. confIguratIon InStallatIon

To install a configuration independently:1. Run the configuration installer (setup.exe).2. In the template directory selection dialog specify the directory to install the

configuration to. 3. Click Next >.4. When the installer completes copying of files, click Finish. The selected configuration is now installed.

Page 24: enterprise manual 1c

24 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

2.3. oBtaInIng a lIcenSe

Depending on the type of distribution kit, a license is provided to the user in the form of a hardware key or a PIN for receiving an electronic software license.When you obtain a software license, it is provided according to computer param-eters such as the name, the version, the OS serial number and installation date, the motherboard name and the number of processors.If any of these parameters change, you will have to obtain a new software license for the platform with a new PIN.For details on protection from unauthorized use of 1C:Enterprise 8 and a full list of key parameters, see "The 1C:Enterprise 8. Administrator Manual", chapter 9, "Protection from Unauthorized Use. Features and Setup". For details on obtaining a software license, see the appendix "Guidelines for Obtaining a Software License" in "The 1С:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Manual".

Page 25: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 3

GettInG started

This chapter explains how to launch the 1C:Enterprise client application.

3.1. applIcatIon Startup

To launch 1C:Enterprise, from the Windows taskbar select Start – All Programs – 1C Enterprise 8.2 – 1C:Enterprise.In the window that opens select an infobase and click 1C:Enterprise.

Fig. 8. 1C:Enterprise startup dialog

To add an infobase to the list, click the Add button. For details on adding and creating infobases, see "Adding an Infobase" on the page 27.To modify infobase parameters, click Change.

3.2. logIn

When an infobase is launched, the system verifies user infobase access rights – authenticates the user.

Page 26: enterprise manual 1c

26 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If the infobase does not have a user list, the user will be logged in.If the infobase has a user list, user authentication options may be connected to the operating system settings depending on the system configuration.If no such setting is specified, you will be prompted to enter the user name and password.

Fig. 9. Login

Specify the user name in this dialog. To do so, select a user from the list or type the name in the User field and enter the password (if specified).The user is logged in after clicking OK.To cancel software startup, click Cancel.

3.2.1. Web client Startup

To launch 1C:Enterprise in the web client mode, enter the URL of the infobase to the web browser address bar. At that the web browser should be specifically configured. For details on web browser configuration, see "Microsoft Internet Explorer Configuration" on the page 173 and "Mozilla Firefox Configuration" on the page 174.

3.2.2. connection Speed Selection

If the infobase parameters make it possible to select the connection speed mode, the startup dialog will have the Slow connection option available:

Fig. 10. Infobase option

Page 27: enterprise manual 1c

27Chapter 3. Getting Started

If Slow connection is checked, 1C:Enterprise operation will feature some specifics listed in "Slow Connection Mode". It is recommended to check it when you connect to the infobase using a slow communication path, e.g. using a GPRS modem.

3.3. addIng an InfoBaSe

To add a new infobase to the list, click Add in the infobase list dialog. The addition mode selection dialog is displayed.

Fig. 11. Selecting a mode for adding an infobase

3.3.1. creating an Infobase

If Create a new infobase is selected, 1C:Enterprise provides an opportunity to create an infobase based on a template infobase or to create an empty infobase.When you click Next >, a selection dialog is displayed.

Fig. 12. Dialog to select infobase creation mode

Page 28: enterprise manual 1c

28 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Select a template in the template list and click Next >. A dialog is displayed to enter the name and select the location type for the infobase.

Fig. 13. Infobase name entry dialog

An infobase name is an arbitrary string of characters. An infobase can be located on a local computer, in a network, on the 1C:Enterprise server or on a web server.Click Next > to proceed with infobase creation.Based on the selected type of location, specify the required infobase parameters and click Next >. At the next step select the infobase startup options:

Fig. 14. Startup options editing dialog

The Authentication method option can have the following values:Autoselect � – in this case authentication using operating system tools is attempted initially while if this attempt fails, the user will be prompted to enter login/pass-word to access the infobase.

Page 29: enterprise manual 1c

29Chapter 3. Getting Started

Prompt for name and password � – in this case login and password entry dialog will always be used for authentication.

The Connection speed option is intended to define the speed of connection with the infobase or 1C:Enterprise server. The following values are possible for the option:

Normal � – regular speed. No specific issues regarding system operation.Low � – slow connection. In this mode there are some specific characteristics in 1C:Enterprise behavior that are described in the chapter "Slow Connection Mode". This mode must be used when you are working with slow connection channels, for example, when connecting through a GPRS modem.Select at start � – in this mode every time an infobase is launched, it will be possible to select the connection speed. The Slow connection check box at the bottom of the 1C:Enterprise Startup window makes it possible. If a specific value (Normal or Low) is set in the infobase properties, the Slow connection check box in the 1C:Enterprise Startup window cannot be toggled and matches the value selected in the infobase properties.

The Additional startup options field is intended to specify various command line options that will be transferred to the executable file. For details on the command line options, see the built-in help (1C:Enterprise 8 Launch and Startup Options).The Default run mode option determines the client that will be used to access the infobase:

Autoselect � – in this mode the client application type will be selected automati-cally.Thin client � – thin client will be used to run the infobase.Web client � – web client will be used to run the infobase. Thick client � – thick client will be used to run the infobase.

1C:Enterprise version: field is intended to specify a specific version number that should be used to access this infobase. For details on operations with infobase list, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide" for the chapter describing infobase list maintenance.

Page 30: enterprise manual 1c

30 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 31: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 4

software InterfaCe

This chapter describes 1C:Enterprise interface and navigation.In 1C:Enterprise a user operates a system of windows. Two types of windows exist: main window and auxiliary windows. The main application window is designed to navigate the application and execute various commands. An auxiliary window is used to work with specific infobase objects (such as documents or list items), to generate reports or execute data proc-essors.By default, each 1C:Enterprise window is displayed on the taskbar and at the window toggle when you press the Alt + Tab keys. In Windows 7, all windows apart from an infobase list window are grouped in a single group on the taskbar.You can use Ctrl + Tab keyboard shortcut to switch between windows of one session.In 1C:Enterprise, you can work in the tabs of a main window working area instead of separate windows. See the "Working in the Tab Mode" section on page 40 for more details.

4.1. MaIn WIndoW

When the system is started up, the main window is displayed. This window is intended to navigate the software and execute various commands. This window presents the entire structure of the application to a user. The most general breakup of functionality is presented in the uppermost part of the window as a sections panel.

Page 32: enterprise manual 1c

32 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

In general, the main application window looks as follows:

Fig. 15. Main application window

This window is arranged so that it allows finding the areas required promptly enough and for execution of the commands needed. To resize the main window, you can use the small area in the lower right corner (with three buried dots).The application title is 'aggregatory' and includes the area of system commands.The left part of the title includes the main menu, the Back/Forward buttons to navi-gate between software areas, and the menu to work with favorites (Favorites).

Fig. 16. Main command bar of the main window

The main menu only includes general commands. These are the commands for operations on files, windows management commands, service commands, etc.

Page 33: enterprise manual 1c

33Chapter 4. Software Interface

TipPress F10 to go to the main menu of the active window when you use your key-board.

The application title is located in the center.

Fig. 17. Right part of the system commands area

By default the right part of the system commands area includes the commands for operations on files, to work with references and standard features such as opening a calendar, a calculator, etc.To close the main window and exit the application, use File – Exit command of the main menu or click the Close button of the main window. You can navigate the application using your keyboard. The built-in help includes the tables listing keyboard shortcuts used for navigation.

4.1.1. desktopWhen you launch the application, the first section to be displayed is the one named the Desktop. To switch to the desktop from other sections, use the Desktop item of the sections panel. Press F6 to switch between desktop forms.For example, a desktop may be arranged as follows:

Fig. 18. Application Desktop

Page 34: enterprise manual 1c

34 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

You can customize arrangement of forms on the desktop. To open the desktop setup dialog, use a corresponding option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any panel when a desktop is open.For details on desktop customization, see "Desktop" on the page 141.

4.1.2. Sections panel

The sections panel lists the sections included in the system.

Fig. 19. Sample sections panel

To switch to a section you need, click a reference in the section name or its picture. When you switch to a section, its content (including nested sections) is displayed as commands in two panels (navigation panel and action panel) and forms in the work area.If the list of sections does not fit the size of the window, scroll buttons will be displayed at the edges of the list:

Fig. 20. Sample scroll buttons on the sections panel

Tip

Press Alt + 1 on your keyboard to switch to the sections panel.

You can also customize the sections panel. To open the sections panel setup dialog, use a suitable option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any panel of the window. Such customization is described in detail in "Sections Panel" on the page 197.

4.1.3. navigation panel

The navigation panel demonstrates the structure of the current section. The panel is a list of hyperlinks. If a section has any subordinate sections, they will be displayed as collapsible groups.

Page 35: enterprise manual 1c

35Chapter 4. Software Interface

Fig. 21. Groups of commands on the navigation panel

The links on the navigation panel are divided into three groups based on specific importance of various work areas:

Important � – links to the work areas that are mostly important for the current section, Normal � – links to the data of the current section,See also � – links to additional information that may not be directly included in the data of the current section but in some situations may be required.

The content of the list of links and how links are arranged into groups (i.e. impor-tance of links) are specified during configuration development.When you click links, new forms are usually opened. At that the forms are opened directly in the main window and replace each other in the work area. To open a form in a new window, select Open in a new window… from the link context menu or click the link while holding Shift down.

NOTE

If a command on the navigation panel does not open a new form, the previous form in the work area is closed.

Tip

Press Alt + 2 on your keyboard to switch to the navigation panel of the current section.

You can customize the navigation panel. To open the panel setup dialog, use a suit-able option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any of the panels.For details on navigation panel, see "Navigation Panel" on the page 143.

4.1.4. action panel

The action panel includes the lists of commands available in the current section. These commands are divided into the following groups: Create, Reports, Tools. Other groups may be available if they are specified in the configuration.

Page 36: enterprise manual 1c

36 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The Create group contains commands intended to create new infobase objects, such as documents and list items. The Reports group contains the commands intended to open forms of reports.The Tools group displays the commands to open service tools. If a group is empty, it is not displayed. You can adjust the height and the width of the panel. When you hover your mouse over a command name, a tooltip is displayed that may provide further information about the action or a link to such information.

Fig. 22. Groups of commands on the action panel

To execute a command of the action panel in a new window, use Open in a new window item of the context menu or select the option while holding Shift down. To resize the action panel, hover your mouse over the three buried dots, left-click them and drag as required. At that, if some of the commands do not fit the available space, these commands will be displayed in the menu that is opened when you click the expand button. For example, as shown in the figure below:

Fig. 23. List of commands in the create group

Note

The height of action panel is stored between sessions for every section independ-ently.

Tip

Press Alt + 3 on your keyboard to switch to the action panel of the current sec-tion.

The assortment and arrangement of commands in the groups of the action panel can be customized in the customization form (for details, see "Action Panel" on the page 144). To open the panel setup dialog, use a suitable option in the shortcut menu, which can be launched on any window panel.

Page 37: enterprise manual 1c

37Chapter 4. Software Interface

4.1.5. Information panel

This panel is used to open history windows, review the last data edited by the user and display a list of the latest notifications (information about system actions).

Fig. 24. Information panel

Clicking the History… button will open the list of the last modified objects. For details on using history, see "History" on the page 127.When you click a hyperlink of a notification, a form will be opened for the object linked to by this hyperlink. For example, clicking the hyperlink Kornet ZAO will open the form of the list item Contractors – Kornet ZAO. For details on notifica-tions, see "Notifications" on the page 129.

4.2. auxIlIarY WIndoW

Auxiliary windows are intended to work with infobase objects, to generate reports and to process data. These windows are displayed independently from the main window. Auxiliary windows may also display a navigation panel. This panel makes it possible to switch to the forms logically connected to the default form of the window without opening a new window.

Fig. 25. Auxiliary window. Sales document

Page 38: enterprise manual 1c

38 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

An auxiliary window is closed using File – Close command which does not close the entire application.Unlimited number of auxiliary windows can be displayed by the software. You can only have one auxiliary window opened for every object (e.g., a document or a list item) unless otherwise specified in the configuration.

TIP

You can drag files from the operating system (for example, from the Explorer window) to the main or auxiliary window of the application. This will result in opening the files same as when you use File – Open command.

4.2.1. auxiliary Window navigation

A navigation panel of an auxiliary window is intended to switch to viewing various data logically connected to those displayed in the default form of the window.A navigation panel may include commands used to switch to the form itself as well as groups of links Go to and See also. If any group is not specified during configu-ration development, it will not be displayed. Other commands may be included in the navigation panel depending on the configuration.If you attempt to click a link for an object that has not been saved, the following warning will be displayed: Data has not yet been recorded. Switching to """" is allowed only after data is recorded. The data will be recorded.When you click OK, the current data will be saved and you will switch to the selected data area. If you click Cancel, the data will not be saved and you will not switch to the data area so you can continue editing the current data normally.Operations with navigation panel in the auxiliary window is similar to those for the navigation panel in the main window with the only exception being that you cannot switch to the form itself in a new window.To return to the default form of an auxiliary window, click the hyperlink in the top of the navigation panel. Note that it is not allowed to open a new window when clicking this link.

4.2.2. form command Bar

A command bar of a form includes the commands that are directly related to the object displayed in the default form. The commands are displayed on the panel as buttons.

Page 39: enterprise manual 1c

39Chapter 4. Software Interface

Fig. 26. Form command bar in an auxiliary window

The default button (the one used when Enter is pressed) is marked on a panel by bold text and a special form. On the form command bar in an auxiliary window the default button is Post and Close.

4.3. general WorKfloW

When working in the 1C:Enterprise mode, a user selects a section of the software. In the section the user switches to the forms currently needed and works with them using navigation panel commands. A user can switch between the displayed data and work with such data both using the mouse and the keyboard.

4.4. WIndoWIng SYSteM operatIon on MultIple MonItorS

The 1C:Enterprise platform allows a user to work comfortable with multiple moni-tors. There are several features of the windowing system, listed below:

The 1C:Enterprise Startup window is opened on the monitor where it was closed �during the previous session.The Splash screen, the Authentication dialog and other startup dialogs: on the �first launch are displayed on the first monitor, on next launches are displayed on the monitor where the main window was opened.The main window of 1C:Enterprise is opened on the monitor where it was �closed by the user in previous session.The Notification window and the Status window are opened on the monitor �where the previous active window was opened.The helper (neither modal or blocking) window might be moved by the user to �another monitor. On the next call it will be opened on the monitor where it was closed previously.Modal and blocking windows are opened on the same monitor where the �blocked window is. If the window on closing was displayed not on the same monitor as the owner, it will be opened next time on the place where it was closed. If the window on closing was on the same monitor as the owner, it will be opened on the same monitor as the owner.

Page 40: enterprise manual 1c

40 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

4.5. WorKIng In the taB Mode

In 1C:Enterprise, you can work with the forms in a main window working area instead of in separate windows. In this mode, all operations are performed in a single window, which may be convenient when you are working with several info-bases or a large number of forms at the same time.The forms are displayed on the tabs of the main window working area.

Fig. 27. The program interface in the tab mode

To change the interface mode to working with tabs, select Tools – Settings in the main menu. In the dialog, set the switch Form opening Mode to In tabs. The setting will apply starting from the first session after restarting.It should be noted that user settings in the tab mode are stored separately from user settings in the separate windows mode.The main window navigation history is not supported in this mode.

4.5.1. tabs

Tabs are created for each form opened. Any number of tabs can be opened on the window bar.

Fig. 28. The Window Bar

Page 41: enterprise manual 1c

41Chapter 4. Software Interface

To switch between the tabs, use the mouse keys or the following keyboard short-cuts: Ctrl + Tab (Ctrl + Shift + Tab) and Ctrl + F6 (Ctrl + Shift + F6).To close a form, press Esc, Ctrl + F4 or the Close form button on the tab.Switching between the sections does not close the form opened, unlike the separate windows mode.Desktop tab. If there are any forms on the desktop, the Desktop tab is the first to be displayed. The tab is automatically displayed at the start and can be closed by pressing Esc. List of tabs. To view a list of all open windows, press the button at the right edge of the window bar. The desktop form will be the first in the list followed by other open forms in alphabetic order. When a form from the list is selected, it is activated on the tab. Forms which lock the owner, lock only the window with the owner form. You can still switch between the tabs with other forms and select sections and commands from navigation and/or action panels.Opening a form in a separate window. To open a form on the tab in a separate window, use the Open in a separate window command in the tab’s shortcut menu. This action is only available for forms with a URL. For example, you cannot open a form for creating an element in a new window on the tab.Commands. Commands on the navigation and action panels open forms in the main window working area. You can open these forms in a new tab with the shortcut menu. A new form in a new tab opens when Open in a new tab is selected for the commands. To open a form in a new tab, select the command while pressing the Ctrl key. To switch to the navigation panel of the window on the tab, press Alt + 4.Commands applicable to forms and some other types of documents are displayed in the main window system menu when a document is activated.The Print, Preview and Save commands are always displayed in the main window and are available for documents that support these commands.Message window. The forms opened in a main window working area use one of the main window’s message panels. As you switch between the tabs, the message window displays messages that relate to the form selected. See the section "Messages" on page 129 for more details on working with messages.Windows menu. The Windows menu (launched at Main menu – Windows) displays windows, including the main window, and the names of any documents opened in the tabs. The current auxiliary window and an active tab of the main window are flagged. The main window is flagged when no tabs are open.

Page 42: enterprise manual 1c

42 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

4.6. the functIonS Menu

In the tab mode, a button for opening the functions menu is added into the system commands area.The functions menu offers convenient access to the commands of any section and contains all of the current section’s commands that are grouped in a similar way as the navigation and action panels.The functions menu can be launched by pressing the relevant button in the system commands area or pressing Alt + `. If the sections panel is missing, it will be displayed automatically when the func-tions menu is launched. If the sections panel, navigation panel or action panel is disabled, it may be launched by pressing Alt + 1, Alt + 2 or Alt + 3 respectively.

Fig. 29. An open functions menu

If you are using a keyboard, you can navigate the commands with the arrow keys (cursor movement keys) and the Home, End and Tab keys. A command is executed with a mouse click, by pressing Enter or the space bar, or with the Open in a new tab command in the shortcut menu. The menu closes automatically when a command is selected.If the functions menu is open and a section is switched, the commands are updated for the section selected. When the functions menu opens, the last command executed is highlighted. To close the functions menu, press the Esc button or the cross in the upper right corner of the Functions menu.

Page 43: enterprise manual 1c

43Chapter 4. Software Interface

4.7. panelS Setup

The navigation and action panels may be displayed even if they contain no commands. Please note that the height of the action panel does not change when you switch between the sections.Use the commands in the main View menu if you want to customize or hide any of the panels.

Fig. 30. The View menu

This submenu allows you to manage the visibility of the panels as well as the content of the sections, navigation and action panels, and the desktop. You can increase the area available for the forms and avoid having to use scrollbars. To hide all panels, use the View – Hide all command bars command in the main menu or press Ctrl + Shift + `. Please note that the Hide all command bars command will not work if the sections panel or navigation and action panels are hidden with the View menu.

Page 44: enterprise manual 1c

44 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 45: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 5

operatIon In forMs

In 1C:Enterprise a user operates forms. A form may contain various items that are used to display information and for users to edit this information. These items can include text boxes, command bars, buttons, check boxes, bookmarks, tables, various charts, fields of text, spreadsheet and HTML documents, fields of geographical and graphical schemas. This chapter covers general techniques used to work with forms and form elements.

5.1. general technIqueS of WorKIng WIth forMS

There are several items which every form has. Normally a form title includes the name of the object or the list of objects displayed in the form. A title for a form is specified during configuration development and cannot be customized by a user.To select an object, hover your mouse over the object and left-click it. Alterna-tively, use the cursor control keys if you use your keyboard. To switch to editing an object, double-click it or press Enter.Form elements may contain tooltips describing the meaning of such items (defined during configuration development). In order to see a tooltip for a specific form attribute, hover your mouse cursor over this attribute. In 1 to 2 seconds, a label will appear near the cursor that describes the purpose of the attribute (provided that the label was created upon setup of the form).navigation through form elements. You can navigate through form elements by pressing Tab or Shift + Tab or by clicking the necessary dialog control.Some elements (for example, the command bar) can be unavailable for navigation with Tab or Shift + Tab based on their settings. You should use your mouse or press Alt + F10 to navigate to such items. You can also press Enter when you complete entering an attribute. This will move the cursor directly to the next dialog item. The sequence of such movements is defined during configuration development.

Page 46: enterprise manual 1c

46 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If provided for in the configuration, a form may also verify whether the entered data is correct and complete. Error messages may be displayed in case of incorrect input.Besides, when you complete entering an attribute, the system may also automati-cally carry out some actions (for example, filling values of other form attributes).Saving form parameters. If a form can be resized, the form’s size and its location on the screen will be remembered when the form is closed and reopened. At the same time the controls will also preserve the sizes they had when the form was closed.Appearance of a form is defined in the configuration and can be customized if customization for the form is supported (All Actions – Change form menu item). The procedure used to customize forms is described in the "Form Setup" section on the page 147.

5.2. draggIng operatIonS

The 1C:Enterprise system supports dragging operations. You can transfer data between various controls. For example, you can transfer catalog list items from one group to another or data from a table box into a spreadsheet document field or a list of selected files from MS Windows Explorer to a control. The following controls support dragging operations: table box, spreadsheet docu-ment field, calendar field and picture box. The possibility of dragging is specified by each control configuring. You can find infor-mation about this option in the description of working with the configuration. Basic actions for controls for which dragging operations are specified are described below.For each object the possibility can be specified to Begin dragging (you can drag from this object) and To drag (you can drag to this object). These properties are set by configuring and can be changed using the built-in language.Dragging is performed by the mouse and is similar to the standard MS Windows method. If dragging events processing is not changed by configuring, simple dragging is performed. Its result depends on the controls type and initial data type. Simple dragging possibilities are shown in the following table:

Target controlSource control Calendar Box Spreadsheet

Document FieldTable box Picture box

Calendar Box No Yes No NoSpreadsheet Document Field No Yes No NoTable box No Yes Yes NoPicture box No No No No

No – simple dragging is not possible.Yes – simple dragging is possible.

Page 47: enterprise manual 1c

47Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

By dragging to the spreadsheet document, the field value is converted to text presentation. Data that has the main presentation defined (for example, the code or description for the catalog) is dragged as the main presentation value. For example, data from the calendar field has the Date value type and is converted in the string according to the current regional settings. If the values table data is displayed in the table box, the ValueTableRow text is placed in the spreadsheet document field.By dragging data within the table box, note that the order of lines cannot be changed in dynamic lists. You can transfer hierarchical data only from one group to another.In the table box containing static data (tabular parts, values tables, values lists, values tree), you can change the order of the lines.If dragging events processing is provided by configuring, you should look for infor-mation about this possibility in the description of working with the configuration. Besides dragging between controls, the 1C:Enterprise allows you to drag data from other applications to controls. The text and file list are dragged.

5.3. fIeldS

Fields are intended to view, enter and edit various types of data. To enter a value into a field, locate your cursor over the field, left-click it, and enter the value (normally you either type it from your keyboard or select it from the drop-down list).

5.3.1. text Box

The methods used to work with an text box depend on the type of data that are edited or viewed in the form element as well as on the settings specified in the configuration.

Fig. 31. Sample form with text boxes

Normally to enter some data into a field, it is sufficient to left-click the area of the field and enter the required data from the keyboard. You can also edit a character string using operating system tools, e.g. the clipboard.When you select a value for a field from the drop-down list, automatic selection of values is activated.

Page 48: enterprise manual 1c

48 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Red underline means that the field is required.Shadowed background of a field means that either the field is filled automatically or it is not recommended to fill the field manually (for example, the Code field on fig. 31 is filled automatically during recording). If you attempt to manually edit the value of such a field, a warning will be displayed.Pressing F4 enables selecting an item from a list (see fig. 32) as a form attribute.

Fig. 32. Selecting a group of contractors from a list

The keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Shift + F4 opens the form of the selected element.

Fig. 33. Opening a form of the selected element from an text box

Shaded background of a text box (similar to that shown for the Code field on fig. 33) means that you should not edit the value in the field.If multiline mode is enabled for a text box, pressing Enter will not switch to the next form element and will instead begin a new line in the same text box.Enhanced entry mode can be enabled for a multiline text box. In this case you can use tab character and standard text search. Note that switching to another control of the form using the Tab key is disabled in this mode.If atext box has a limited size and data is pasted from the clipboard, only the portion of the initiate text will be taken from the clipboard that fits the available space (or the highlighted text).

Page 49: enterprise manual 1c

49Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

5.3.1.1. StringIf an text box is connected to string data, it will look as follows:

Fig. 34. Sample string text box

5.3.1.2. NumberIf an text box is connected to some numeric data (for example, a number or a sum), the selection button will look as a calculator and the value in the field can be edited using the calculator displayed when the button is clicked.

Fig. 35. Using a calculator to enter a number into an text box

It is also possible to define a value using a spin button.

Fig. 36. Editing a value of an text box with a slider

If you enter invalid data into a field and attempt to switch to another form control or close the form, a warning will be displayed. Incorrect data entered into field. When you click ОK, the software will prompt you to correct such invalid data.

5.3.1.3. DateIf a text box is intended to enter a date, it will either display dots or colons as sepa-rators depending on the settings.You can also use the built-in calendar to enter a date:

Fig. 37. Entering a date into a text box using the calendar

If a text box contains both date and time and only the date is displayed (or only the date and partial time), if you edit the date in the text box, the remaining portion of the time value will remain unchanged after such editing.

Page 50: enterprise manual 1c

50 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If you enter invalid data into a field and attempt to switch to another form control or close the form, a warning will be displayed. Incorrect data entered into field. When you click ОK, the software will prompt you to correct such invalid data.

5.3.1.4. Various Data TypesIn addition to the above types of an attribute values, you can also use values from the filled in lists to enter a value into a form. If a form’s attribute does not have the value that belongs to one of the so-called "primitive types" (numbers, strings, dates), the text box for such an attribute (or the selection field) will include the Select button. Clicking the button will display the list of items belonging to this type for you to select the required value.

Fig. 38. Entering data of an arbitrary type

In this window you should select the required element type name. In the list of data that opens select the required value.Sometimes you can select the value without opening a dedicated window, in a list that pops up when you click the selection button next to the attribute you are editing.

Fig. 39. Text box with a pop-up list

This is possible for lists containing a moderate number of values. In this situation it is impossible to edit values or add new values.

Tip

You can also press F4 to select a control while Ctrl + Shift + F4 keyboard shortcut will open the form of the selected control.

Selecting the value. You can select the required line in a list by double clicking it. You can also use all the features used for operations with a list in addition to simply selecting a value: enter a new value, edit, delete, rearrange groups (for hierarchical lists), etc.

Page 51: enterprise manual 1c

51Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

Using the Keyboard to Enter Data into an Text boxAnother way to fill into a field is to type the data from the keyboard. When you complete typing the text or make a pause, a selection list is displayed.When more than 50 items are identified for the list, the warning will be displayed.If you select an object marked for deletion in the field, the specific warning will be displayed as well.If no object corresponds to the text entered, the system offers three possible actions: select from the list, continue or cancel data entry. If you press Cancel entry, the value in the text box is restored to the initial one.

NOTE

You cannot enter text for attributes of undefined types (for example, of the com-posite type) unless you specify a specific data type.

Declining the Selected ValueIn order to clear the value selected from a list, click the Clear button located to the right from the attribute field (if the button is defined during configuration develop-ment) or press Shift + F4.

Fig. 40. Text box with a clear button

5.3.2. check box

A Check box control is intended to enable or disable a certain value. Check boxes with two or three states may be used.

Fig. 41. Sample check box in a form

If a checkbox in a table column or a form is disabled, it is displayed differently.To toggle the value of a check box, click it or if you use your keyboard you should first activate it using Tab or Shift + Tab and press the Spacebar. If a check box has two states, you can also use the + (plus) and - (minus) keys to toggle it.

5.3.3. radio Button

The Radio Button form control is intended to select one of multiple possible values. The required value is selected using your mouse. If you use your keyboard, you should first activate the currently selected value of the radio button using Tab

Page 52: enterprise manual 1c

52 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

or Shift + Tab, select the required value using the arrow keys and press Enter. For example, a form of a good provides for selection of the type of goods:

Fig. 42. Type of goods radio button

5.4. progreSS Bar

The progress bar only designates the current state of associated form attribute (it is specified during designing of the configuration).

Fig. 43. Progress bar

5.5. SlIder

You can use the Slider for quick and vivid input of numeric values. Its appearance is similar to an ordinary scroll bar placed vertically or horizontally on a picture under the associated text box.

Fig. 44. Value adjustment slider

The value of the associated attribute is determined by the slider's position and by the minimum and maximum values specified during designing of the configuration. You can move the slider using the arrow keys but it is more convenient to use the mouse.

5.6. hYperlInK

A form may contain controls that are formatted as text but when you hover the mouse cursor over this text, the cursor will change to a hand (see fig. 45) and the text will be underlined. This control is named a Hyperlink. The control is intended to switch to a specific object (e.g. to open other forms). To select a hyperlink, click it or activate it using Tab or Shift + Tab and press Enter. Designing of a configuration defines hyperlinks behavior when they are clicked on. Pictures located in forms can also have hyperlinks. When you mouse-over a hyperlinked picture, the cursor will change to the one shown on shown on fig. 45.

Fig. 45. Hyperlink in a form

5.7. Button

Buttons in a form are used to perform some actions specified by the form algorithm. To select a button, click it or activate it using Tab or Shift + Tab and press Enter.

Page 53: enterprise manual 1c

53Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

One of the buttons in a form can be predefined, and you can press it not only by clicking but also by pressing Ctrl + Enter. For some buttons, other keyboard shortcuts may be provided that enable the user to select them without using the mouse and without reaching it by tabbing through the form controls. For some buttons a pressing display mode can be specified. These buttons are used to enable or disable some mode.

5.8. taBle

A form may contain a table that is intended to view a list containing multiple columns. The assortment of columns depends on the purpose of the specific form. The rows contain the data that you can view and edit in some cases. An example is a nomenclature list in the Sales document.

Fig. 46. List of goods in the sales document

In some forms, columns are located so that their values in each table row are displayed on two or more levels. This allows to display more information in a row simultaneously without horizontal scrolling of the table.Adding, copying, deleting, editing, sorting, filtering and other actions on data contained in a list are generally performed using the list command bar buttons or using commands of the context menu opened in the list area (if such actions are provided for during configuration development).Methods of working with a table depend on the type of data being edited or displayed in the form control as well as on the settings specified in the configuration or determined by the 1C:Enterprise script. These methods generally match those rules used to work with an text box. To begin editing a cell, press Enter or highlight the cell and begin editing. To complete editing a row of a table, press Shift + F2.

Page 54: enterprise manual 1c

54 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Viewing a table. You can use your mouse and keyboard to view a table.For convenience of viewing a table’s content, you can resize the width of columns. To do so, hover the cursor over the column border so that its form changes and left-click the border. Select the required column width by moving the mouse, and then release the mouse button. The selected column sizes are saved. Holding the Ctrl key while resizing the column width prevents the adjacent columns from been affected. Use this method if there are no titles for some system lists. If the column width prevents you from seeing the entire field content, you can view it using the following actions. Place the cursor over the required column in the row you need and the entire content of the field will be displayed near the cursor. You can change the column order when viewing the table. If you need to specify an order for the columns, use form customization procedure described on the page 204. In some tables you can select multiple rows of a list. Holding Ctrl key down, select the required rows with your mouse or arrow keys. Editing a table’s cell. To edit a table’s attribute, highlight the cell containing this attribute and begin editing. To complete editing of a cell, press Enter.Inserting a row. To insert a new row into a table, press Ins. The new cell of the row automatically switches to editing mode. Pressing Enter after you specify a value for the attribute switches the cursor to the next cell.

Note

If the cursor "jumps over" some cells when you enter a row in a table and press Enter, this means that the configuration specifies for these table columns to be skipped.

Deleting a row. To delete a row of a table, highlight the row using the arrow keys or your mouse and press Del.

Warning!

The rows are deleted without any additional warning.

Copying a row. A new row can be added to a table by copying an existing one. To do so, select the template row using arrow keys or your mouse and press F9. This will add a new row to the table. This row will be filled with the values copied from the template row.numbers of rows. The leftmost column of a table contains the numbers of the rows. When a new row is added to a table, it is automatically assigned the next sequence number.A form can have an order for the table rows defined. At that rows can be moved up and down. To move the rows, use the Move Up and Move Down commands. When rows are moved, their numbers are changed automatically.

Page 55: enterprise manual 1c

55Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

Sorting of table rows. Rows in a table can be sorted randomly if it is provided for in the configuration. You can sort rows by data of any columns by selecting the column and using All Actions – Sort Descending or Sort Ascending.If you need to specify a more complex order table elements, use form customization procedure described on the page 204.

5.9. groupS

In the software it is possible to join various form elements into groups. Groups can include fields, columns of a list, pages, commands. Columns of a list can also be joined into vertical or horizontal groups. In the example below you can see the following vertical group of columns in a list on a form:

Fig. 47. Groups of list columns

Elements in a form can be visually arranged into groups. A group can be separated with a line or a frame. For example, as shown in the figure below:

Fig. 48. Groups of fields in a form

You can move the form elements between groups. The system defines if such a movement is possible. If the movement requires some properties of an element to be changed, the changes will be applied automatically. For example, if you move a group of elements to a group with the Pages view, the property View will be changed from Standard group to Page. If this causes changes in requirements to subordinate elements, these elements are either changed automatically or deleted.For details on form customization, see "Form Setup" on the page 147.

5.9.1. command Bar

A form can contain the groups of controls of the Command Bar type. Every command bar consists of a set of buttons (commands) that are effective only for this given form or a specific portion of the form. Use keyboard shortcut Alt + F10 to activate a command bar. The panel cannot be selected when you switch between form controls using Tab or Shift + Tab. All the buttons are tabbed through and the action is applied by clicking a button of the panel (pressing Enter).

Page 56: enterprise manual 1c

56 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.9.2. pages

A form may include pages if it is provided for in the configuration. Page tabs may be displayed vertically (from top to bottom) or horizontally (from left to right) from the page content.Left-click the required page to select it. You can also switch between pages using Ctrl + PgUp (next) or Ctrl +PgDn.Every page may include its own form controls. For example, the Invoice document form may include a tab named Goods that will include the list of goods and another tab named Other containing a field for additional description of the shipment (as shown on fig. 49).

Fig. 49. Pages in the invoice document

5.10. chart

A chart can be nested in a form or a spreadsheet document. You can manage a chart nested in a form. Customize it using the attributes avail-able in the form (the assortment is determined during configuration development). You can select another type of chart if source data allows. For details on working with a chart in a spreadsheet document, see "Working with Charts" in the Appendix named "Spreadsheet Document Editor" available in the electronic version of the documentation.

5.11. text docuMent fIeld

A text document field is used to work with texts. It includes a window of the text editor intended to enter and save lines of text. For details on working with the editor, see Appendix named Text Document Editor (available in the electronic form of the documentation).

5.12. htMl docuMent fIeld

An HTML document field is intended to view an HTML document in a form. When you view the information available in the field, you can navigate by links (if any).The following commands are available for the field: Print, Preview, Save As, Save Copy.

Page 57: enterprise manual 1c

57Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

5.13. graphIcal ScheMa fIeld

A Graphical Schema Field form control is intended to view and edit a graphical schema.Editing of graphical schemas is described in Appendix 4 Graphical Schema Editor (available in the electronic version of the documentation). The order for tabbing the schema elements is specified during configuration devel-opment.You can select the scale to view a graphical schema using the Graphical Schema – Scale menu item.You can also change scale using a mouse with scroll wheel by pressing and holding Ctrl.This field supports display of common route maps of business processes or route maps of particular instances of business processes, taking passed and active route points into account.A route map of the sales business process can be quoted as an example of displaying a route map in a graphical schema.

Fig. 50. Graphical schema of a route map

The passed points of a route are displayed with shaded background (Billing on the figure). A route point is considered to be passed when all the tasks associated with the point have been performed. Active points are framed with a red dashed line. A route point is considered to be active when it has one or more incomplete tasks associated (Bill approval on the figure).

Page 58: enterprise manual 1c

58 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.14. pIcture fIeld

The Picture Field element is used to place various images in the form. This element can also contain a link (see the "Hyperlink" description).In some situations when the picture does not fit in the field, scroll bars are displayed when you select the element. These scroll bars make it possible to view the entire picture (if it is provided for in the configuration). If scroll bars are available, you can also move the picture using the arrow keys, Home (show top left corner), End (show bottom right corner), PgUp (go up by window size vertically or horizontally if Alt is held down), and PgDn (go down by window size vertically or horizontally if Alt is held down).If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can scroll the image vertically by rotating the wheel forward (up) and backward (down). If you press Shift while scrolling, the picture will be scrolled horizontally. The Picture Field element of a form will have a context menu with the following options: Copy, Save As, View Picture. The Copy menu item copies the picture to the clipboard for subsequent paste into another application. The Save As menu is available for the pictures loaded from files. Use it to save a picture as a file on the disk.If you select the View Image command, the window for viewing the picture will be displayed. This window includes buttons to zoom in and out and to select actual size. The window can be resized. Use the Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Original Size menu items to select the required scale. You can also use the NumPad keys to change scale as well. Pressing + (plus) zooms in while pressing – (minus) zooms out. The Original Size command selects the actual size of the picture.Please note that the picture should be "in focus" for all the actions executed with your mouse; this means that you should first click it. If you click one of the buttons, this button will be in focus and further mouse actions (scrolling and scaling) will be disabled until the focus is switched back to the picture itself again.You can also change scale using a mouse with a scrolling wheel by pressing and holding Ctrl. To zoom in, rotate the wheel forward, and to zoom out, rotate it back-ward. You can also change scale using + (plus) and – (minus) keys located to the right of the NumPad.

5.15. SpreadSheet docuMent fIeld

A form can contain a nested spreadsheet document (the Spreadsheet Document Field element). For details on working with the Spreadsheet Document Field, see Appendix 3 supplied in electronic version of the documentation.

Page 59: enterprise manual 1c

59Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

navigating in spreadsheets. A spreadsheet document window always displays only a portion of the spreadsheet located in the window. Use your mouse to select a cell of the spreadsheet. The selected cell is activated. Use scroll bars to display the areas that did not fit in the window.

Tip

To scroll a document horizontally, press and hold Shift and use the mouse scroll wheel.

For convenient scrolling of a large document, you can press the mouse wheel and select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on the distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse wheel was pressed (specifically designated).Managing a spreadsheet view. Use the Table – View submenu items to configure view of various areas and components of a spreadsheet document: column and row headers, grid, etc. Let us briefly describe the View menu items. Every menu item works as a radio button: when an item is selected (pressed), the corresponding area is displayed or hidden.

Menu item ActionDock the table Locks the top rows and left columns of a spreadsheet document so that

they will always be displayed when the document is paged throughShow grid Toggles display of the spreadsheet grid (thin lines that separate cells)Show Headers Manages display of the row and column headers in a spreadsheet docu-

mentShow Groups Shows and hides groups – the areas to the left of the row header or above

the column headerEdit Locks or unlocks spreadsheet documents for changesShow comments Toggles display of commentsBlack and white view Toggles display of colors specified for the spreadsheet document. When

this item is selected (checked in the menu), all the colors will be defined by Microsoft Windows operating system settings

Page view mode Toggles display of a minimum number of rows (depends on the entered information), print area, page breaks

Scale Performs a discrete image scale. When this item is selected, a submenu opens that you can use to select the desired scale for the spreadsheet document

Tip

Scale can also be changed using a mouse with a scroll wheel. Press and hold Ctrl and rotate the mouse wheel. Turn the wheel forward to zoom in or backward to zoom out.

Page 60: enterprise manual 1c

60 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Docking a table (headers). In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor, the top rows and left columns of a spreadsheet document may be locked so that they are always displayed when scrolling through the document. To dock the top rows of a spreadsheet document, highlight the entire row and select the Table – View – Dock the Table menu item. All the rows above the highlighted one will be docked.To lock spreadsheet columns, select the entire spreadsheet column. All the columns to the left of the selected one will be docked.To lock spreadsheet rows and columns simultaneously, highlight one cell of the spreadsheet. All the rows and columns to the top and left of the highlighted cell respectively will be locked.To unlock the locked elements, select Dock the Table again.Setting as read-only. To prevent a spreadsheet document from editing, use Table – View – Edit menu item (this item should be unchecked). If a cell contains the text that does not completely fit in the visible area, on mouse-over the text is displayed as a tooltip. If the text is too large to fit in a tooltip, only part of the text will be shown.

5.16. the forMatted docuMent fIeld

A form may have a Formatted document field element used for storing text documents with the following formatting: color highlighting, text font changes, hyperlinks, pictures, etc.This field may be used to create an e-mail message or edit a simple html document. If a formatted document field is in View only mode, the user may navigate the links in the document. Navigation is performed in a new browser window. The main menu File – Save and Save As commands help save formatted documents as text files or html documents.Documents can be formatted with the commands in the command bar of the docu-ment being formatted. Below is a short description of formatting options.

Changing FontsThere are two ways to change the font in a document.

Select the � Font menu option and then choose the font, font size and style (Bold, Underlined, Italic, Crossed out) in the Select font dialog, then press OK.Select the text for which you want to change the font and increase or decrease �the font size incrementally using the toolbar commands, and then select the font style (bold, italic or underlined).

Page 61: enterprise manual 1c

61Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

Selecting Text and Background Colors1C:Enterprise allows you to highlight the text with a background color or text color. To do this, select the text and choose Change background color on the toolbar (to change the background color of the text) or Change text color (to change the color of the text itself). Select the color in the Choose color dialog and press OK.

Inserting a HyperlinkFormatted document text may contain hyperlinks.Select an object (text or picture) and choose the Insert hyperlink menu command. The formatting dialog is then displayed on the screen. Specify the hyperlink address in the Hyperlink field and press OK.You can format the selected object in the style normally used for hyperlinks, which is blue underlined text.

Inserting a PictureYou can also include pictures in a formatted document. To insert an image file, select the Insert picture command and choose the file you want in the standard file selection dialog.

Inserting SymbolsUse the Insert symbol command to add symbols from the list into a text.

Inserting a ListUse the Bulleted list option to start a bulleted list, or the Numbered list option to start a numbered one. Then enter the text. To add the following element to the list, press Enter. To end the list, press Enter twice or press Backspace to delete the last bullet or number in the list.

Alignment SetupThe text may be aligned to the left or right margins. A justified alignment (i.e., to both the left and right margins) may also be used.Select the text you want to align and press Left / Right / Center / Justified.

Indented TextYou can increase or decrease indention for one or several text passages from the edge of the field. Select the text and press Increase indent to increase indention, or Decrease indent to decrease it.

Page 62: enterprise manual 1c

62 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Line SpacingTo set the line spacing, select the text and choose Line spacing. In the window that opens enter the desired spacing with the keyboard or with the keys and press OK.

5.17. ManagIng a forM and SavIng SettIngS

When numerous attributes are located in a form, the configuration can specify for saving the sets of the attributes with their values to use them when required. The commands Save Parameters and Restore Parameters are used for this.

Fig. 51. Commands to manage form parameters

Enter the required values for the form fields and select Save Parameters… In the Saving Parameters window that opens enter a name for the set of the parameters to be saved and click Save.

Fig. 52. Saving form parameters

To use the form parameters that were earlier saved, select Restore Parameters item. In the window that opens select a set of parameters and click Select.

Fig. 53. Selecting the saved form parameters

The parameters of the selected set will be used as the parameters for this form.

Page 63: enterprise manual 1c

63Chapter 5. Operation in Forms

5.18. SpecIfIc featureS of SoMe forMS

When you work in most forms, you can call any software functions (using the main menu, commands and actions of the navigation panel, toolbar buttons, keys) and switch to other open windows. But some forms do not allow this. For example, the main is not available while a form is opened. So you should complete all required actions in such a form and close it before you can call other modes. You also can close the form by pressing Esc. In addition to normal forms, a configuration can operate spreadsheet and text docu-ments.

Page 64: enterprise manual 1c

64 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 65: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 6

lIsts

Various lists are most frequently used in 1C:Enterprise to display information.

Fig. 54. The list of ‘sales of goods’ documents and the command bar

If this is not prohibited in a specific configuration or for a specific user, a list can be edited on the fly: new entries can be added while the existing ones can be edited or removed.Lists are managed in two forms: list form and item selection form. To switch to a form containing a list of objects, you should normally select the respective link of the navigation panel.A list is only opened in the selection form when you enter a form attribute value by clicking the selection button or pressing F4. Various forms for selecting items and folders may be defined in the configuration.Normally a selection form provides for locating the cursor in the required list item and press Enter to select the current item as the value for the edited attribute or to create a new object. In a list form pressing Enter for the current item opens an editing form. You can change the software behavior for when Enter is pressed during configuration development.

Page 66: enterprise manual 1c

66 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

6.1. vIeWIng a lISt

General methods used to work with tables are also applicable to viewing lists. These methods are described in details in "Table" on the page 71.

Fig. 55. Form of the goods list

A list form is usually a table displaying a list of items. The assortment of the columns in the table is defined in the configuration. The assortment and positions of the columns in a table may vary. That is, a configu-ration may provide for multiple visual representations of the same list.Left-clicking a column of a list will sort the information in the list by the value in the column.A user can customize the assortment of the displayed columns using All Actions – Change Form… menu item. The procedure of forms customization is described in "Form Setup" on the page 147.If a list contains numerous items (rows) and columns, only a part of the list is displayed in the form with scroll bars available at the bottom and on the right of the list. Both items and folders of a list can be marked for deletion. They are usually marked with struck out icons in the leftmost column of the list.Resizing column height in the lists is recorded. The size is saved and is used when the window is next opened. If a list is opened in a new window, the width of the columns is saved accompanied by the size and location of the window itself.

6.1.1. hierarchical lists

You can use the 1C:Enterprise platform to manage hierarchical lists having an unlimited number of nested levels (the limitation can be applied during configura-tion development).

Page 67: enterprise manual 1c

67Chapter 6. Lists

Hierarchical lists include items belonging to various levels with the items of the lower levels subordinating to those of the higher levels. There are two types of hierarchy of lists: hierarchy of folders and items and hierarchy of items. A specific type is defined in the configuration. A list that has hierarchy of groups and items includes two types of items: folders and the items themselves. A folder is a node that includes other (subordinate) groups and items. An item is a specific object. In the lists with hierarchy of items any item can be both a node and an individual object. A list of departments can be quoted as an example. Every department may include other departments but all the departments will have the same assortment of properties. A hierarchical list has the following view modes: hierarchical list, list, tree. The modes are switched using All Actions – View Mode menu item. The current view mode is designated by a ‘clicked icon’ (this icon has a frame next to the menu item).List Mode. If you select List as a view mode, the form will display all the items of the list. Folders and items are displayed together without separation.

Fig. 56. List view mode

Hierarchical List Mode. If the Hierarchical List mode is enabled for items having a hierarchy of folders and items, only the top level items are displayed, while only items that are subordinate to a folder are shown when you switch to this folder.

Fig. 57. Contractors list in the hierarchical list mode

Hidden folder � – a row corresponds to a folder of items. Left-clicking this icon will expand the folder so that you could switch to management of items included in the folder.

Page 68: enterprise manual 1c

68 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Expanded folder � – the row contains the name of the folder opened for viewing. This row is always located in the top of the table, right under the column headers of the list. Left-clicking the icon in the row collapses the folder.List item � – the row is an item of the list.

A folder in a list can be expanded in one of the following ways: double-clicking the line in the list that contains the name of the group; �left-clicking [+] in the line with the name of the group; �placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the desired folder and �pressing Ctrl + Down Arrow; placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the folder and pressing � + on the NumPad;placing the cursor in the row containing the name of the desired folder and �selecting All Actions – Down one level.

To return to the previous level, you can press Ctrl + Up Arrow while in any row of the folder or select All Actions – Up one level. Tree Mode. If you select Tree as the view mode, the items of the list will be displayed as a tree.

Fig. 58. Hierarchical list in the tree mode

You can expand and collapse a tree for convenience. The + (plus) sign in the branch node indicates that this branch can be expanded. Left-clicking this sign will expand the next level of the branch for viewing and the + (plus) sign will switch to - (minus). You can collapse a branch of a tree by clicking the - (minus) sign. If a tree is expanded, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to move to the required folder.To expand a folder and simultaneously switch to a lower-level folder, use the Ctrl + Down Arrow keyboard shortcut. To move to the parent folder, use Ctrl + Up Arrow.To collapse a tree node and all its subordinate nodes, use Shift + Alt + Num-.To collapse all the tree nodes, use Ctrl + Shift + Alt + Num-.To expand a tree node and all its subordinate nodes, use Shift + Alt + Num+.

Page 69: enterprise manual 1c

69Chapter 6. Lists

To expand all the tree nodes, use Ctrl + Shift + Alt + Num+.Also in any view mode both a tree and a list can have a tree node expanded using Num+ or collapsed using Num-.To quickly navigate to the beginning or to the end of a list, you can use Home and End keys, respectively.The lists with hierarchy of items in the Tree mode are viewed similarly to viewing the lists with hierarchy of folders and items. At that the icons used are the same for the lists with hierarchy of items.

Fig. 59. List with hierarchy of items in the tree view mode

6.2. creatIng a lISt IteM

To create a new item, use All Actions – Create command in the form of the list or simply press Ins.If a new item that is added to a hierarchical list should be located in a specific folder of the list right away, you should switch to this folder before creating the item (Hierarchical List or Tree mode should be enabled).

NOTE

If List view mode is selected for a hierarchical list, a new item will be created in the root folder.

If an item form includes a Folder attribute, you can specify any other folder the item should belong to irrespective of the mode and current folder.When a new item is added to a list, the data is edited in a displayed editing form (window) of this item. The appearance of this window, its properties and behavior of the controls are defined in the configuration.General methods of working with a form are used to edit attributes of a list item. Detailed information about these methods is provided in "General Techniques of Working with Forms" on the page 45.Validity and completeness of the data can be verified when a user works in the form that creates a list item. Error messages may be displayed in case of incorrect input. When you are done entering the attributes, click Write and Close or another similar button intended to save the results of editing to record the created item

Page 70: enterprise manual 1c

70 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

in the list or close the form using the button intended to close the window. When you are prompted to save changes, select Yes to record the newly created item to the list or No not to save it.Press Esc to cancel adding the new item to the list.

TIP

To add a new item to a list, use a command of the Create group of the action panel.

6.2.1. creating a folder in a listTo create a new folder, use the All Actions – Create Group menu item in the list form.If the newly created folder to be added to a list should be located in a specific folder of this list, you should switch to this folder before adding the new one (Hierarchical List or Tree mode should be enabled).If the Folder attribute is available in the form used to add a new folder, you can specify any other folder for the newly added folder to belong to irrespective of the mode and current folder.Similarly to creating a new list item, when you create a new folder, the attributes of the folder are edited in the folder form displayed.The system does not differentiate between the codes of list items or item folders; that is, folder codes and item codes cannot coincide.Otherwise the methods of adding a list folder and editing it are the same as those used to create an item.

6.2.2. copying a list ItemA new item or a folder can be added to a list by copying an existing item or folder. To do so, locate the cursor in the row containing the item or folder to be used as a template and select All Actions – Copy.This will display the form intended to create a new item. At that all the attributes will be copied from the attributes of the template item. If automatic code assign-ment is not specified for the list, the code of the new item will be copied from the template item.You can edit the attributes using the general rules described in "Editing List Items" below.

6.3. edItIng lISt IteMS

To edit an item, locate your cursor in any cell of the row that you want to edit the attributes for, and press Enter or double-click anywhere in the row or press F2. This will open the list item editing form where you can edit the required attributes.

Page 71: enterprise manual 1c

71Chapter 6. Lists

When a list item form is opened (or multiple forms are opened), the list form is still available for operations in the application window: you can add new items and folders, delete them or move items from one folder to another – that is, you can use all the operations with lists provided by the software.If a list is read-only, the information in the opened form will not be available for editing.

6.3.1. list rearrangement

When you work with hierarchical lists, you may need to rearrange the items of a list, i.e. to move items or folders of items from one folder to another. To move an item or a folder to another folder of the list:1. Highlight the row in the list that contains the item or the folder that should be

moved to another location of the list. 2. Select All Actions – Move to folder.3. In the dialog that opens select the folder where you want the selected item to be

located.

TIP

List elements may be dragged between the groups with a mouse. Please note that there is no way to drag an element to the parent group in a hierarchical list.

If the configuration supports unique list item codes, the code of the moved item must be different from the codes of the items that already exist in the destination folder. If the codes match, the following message is displayed: <Field name> field value not unique. At that, you need to correct the code of the moved item.

6.3.2. Selecting a value from a list

A list can be opened to select an item from this list. In this situation, a list is opened by clicking the selection button or by pressing F4 when an attribute is entered from a list.When a list is opened to select a value, the window of the list may be somewhat different from that displayed when it is simply opened (e.g. the assortment and posi-tion of columns in the list may be different, a folder tree may be absent or located in a different position, etc). You can create various forms for different modes of working with lists. As a rule, a selection form contains the minimum required infor-mation; it frequently consists only of the name and code columns (see fig. 60).The item selection form supports the same actions that are available in the list form: adding new items to a list, editing additional attributes of the existing list items, moving items to other folders (if the window contains a folder tree), etc.

Page 72: enterprise manual 1c

72 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 60. Selecting an attribute value from a list

For example, if a list of companies does not have the company you need, you can enter it right here and select it immediately to use as a document attribute. You can also edit some attributes of an existing company (if this is available for a specific user).

NOTE

Please note that the Enter key behavior has major differences in different forms. In a selection form, pressing Enter results in selecting and closing the required item (unless otherwise specified in the configuration), while in the forms of lists it results in opening the form to view and edit it. To edit a list item in the selection form, use commands of the All Actions menu or F2.

Information in the selection form is synchronized with that available in the list form so all the changes that you make in one window will be reflected in the other one.To select a list item, you should locate the cursor in the row with the desired item and press Enter or click the Select button on the command bar (if it is provided for in the configuration). For the hierarchical lists in the forms of items you can specify a folder this item belongs to (if it is provided for in the configuration). For some attributes you can select both items and folders. You can use the standard selection method, by holding the Shift key down to select a folder quickly.

Tip

The selection form is not actually required to select data from a list. It is suf-ficient to type the code or begin typing the name of the required item in the text box. Codes are particularly convenient when such codes are frequently used and are easy to remember (e.g. the numbers of departments) or are available in the primary documents (e.g. a part number or barcode for some goods).

Page 73: enterprise manual 1c

73Chapter 6. Lists

6.3.2.1. Predefined List ItemsA list may have predefined items (if it is provided for in the configuration). These items are added during configuration development and cannot be deleted in the 1C:Enterprise mode. You can only edit attributes of such items.

6.3.3. Search in lists

There are several ways of searching for the required information in a list. They are described below.

6.3.3.1. Quick SearchTo quickly switch to the desired row in a list, you can use quick search mode. To perform a quick search, simply begin typing the desired value on your keyboard.This will automatically open the normal search window with the value displayed in the field named What to search.

Fig. 61. Search window

To search non-exact matches for reference-type attributes in the Where to Search field, select a name of an attribute marked with (by string).The Search within results checkbox will become available during the search. If you select this checkbox, you will be able to search within the results of the previous search.Search results will be displayed in the current work area as a flat list.To return to the previous state of the list, click Cancel search or press Ctrl + Q.

6.3.3.2. Custom SearchYou can search within any column of a list.To carry out a custom search:1. Click Find in the command bar or press Ctrl + F.2. Specify search criteria in the search dialog.3. Click Find in the Find dialog.

Page 74: enterprise manual 1c

74 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

This will display all the rows meeting the specified conditions in the current window. If no such rows can be identified, the list will be empty. To return to the previous data presentation, use the Cancel search command or press Ctrl + Q.What to search field is intended to enter the value of the data type contained in the column selected in the Where to search field. Search by a substring is used for rows (if the entered search string is shorter than the field to be searched in) while the attributes containing a date can have search by date without accounting for time used. Exact match is searched for the remaining values. To search non-exact matches for reference-type attributes in the Where to Search field, select the name of an attribute marked with (by string).If hierarchical data is displayed in a list, you can search for data taking their hier-archy into account (Search in folders parameter): in the entire list (In all groups), In the current group and the child groups or In the current folder without the child groups. If you select Current folder and subfolders, search will be carried out in the data of the currently opened folder and its subfolders.If you select Current folder without subfolders, search will only be carried out in the data of the opened folder while the data of the subfolders will be ignored.Search history is stored for the user to be able to use the previously searched for values by selecting them from the dropdown list of the What to search field.

6.4. lISt cuStoMIzatIon

You can customize the order of columns in a list, their visibility and the behavior of the list when data is opened and managed, in the Form Customization dialog. The dialog is opened using All Actions – Change Form command. For details on form customization, see "Form Setup" on the page 147.Customization of data display, sorting of a list rows, grouping of a list in a table and list layout is carried out in the List Options dialog. The dialog is opened using All Actions – Configure List command.This dialog is intended to customize:

List filtering �The fields to order by �The fields to group the data by �Conditional appearance of the list �

The settings are displayed in the lists arranged in four tabs of the window. A setting is applied to a list if it is checked. You can specify the order for elements of one setting to be applied.

Page 75: enterprise manual 1c

75Chapter 6. Lists

You can customize data display in the list same as you customize the report variant in the data composition system.Click ОK to apply a setting.

6.4.1. filter

To apply a filter to a list, select the value for the filter on the Filter tab of the list customization dialog. To do so, select the Value column in the item row and click Select or press F4.

Fig. 62. List customization filter

To add a filter item, click Add or drag the required field from the Available fields list.Select Comparison type in the list that pops up when you click Select in the Comparison type column.If required, you can define an order for the criteria to be applied to the list. This is done using Move up and Move down buttons of the command bar.To apply a filter to a list, click OK.For details on using filters and the comparison types, see "Filter" section on the page 116.

6.4.2. Sorting

To apply sorting to a list, select a value on the Sort tab of the customization dialog or simply check an existing sorting item (see fig. 63).To add a sorting item, click Add or drag a field from the Available fields list and select Sort direction (ascending / descending).If required, specify an order for the sorting items using Move up and Move down buttons.

Page 76: enterprise manual 1c

76 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 63. Adjusting a list sorting

If there are several sorting fields in the list, data will be sorted by the first, second, etc. fields. To apply a sorting to a list, click OK.For details on using sorting, see "Sorting" on the page 119.

NOTE

It is impossible to sort lists by the fields that contain unlimited length strings.

6.4.3. group

To join records in a list into a group, add a field to group by on the Group tab. If multiple fields are selected, the records in the list will be grouped in succession in the order specified for the fields of the group. Click OK to apply a group setting.

Fig. 64. Adjusting a list grouping

Page 77: enterprise manual 1c

77Chapter 6. Lists

NOTE

It is impossible to group lists by the fields that contain unlimited length strings.

6.4.4. conditional appearance

Use conditional appearance elements to arrange a list.To create an element of conditional appearance, click Add on the Conditional Appearance tab. Elements of conditional appearance are edited in a separate window.

Select the required appearance parameters on the � Appearance tab: background color, font color, etc.Specify the condition for formatting to be applied to the fields on the � Condition tab. A condition is specified in the same manner as it is for filter.On the � Formatted fields tab from the list of available fields select those fields for appearance to be applied to if the condition is satisfied.

If required, define the order for the used appearance elements with Move up and Move down buttons.The order of appearance elements defines the sequence for appearance to be applied to report elements. If two different appearances apply to a report area, the one that is the last in the list of conditional appearance elements is applied.For details on customization of conditional appearance, see "Conditional Appear-ance" on the page 119.Click OK to apply a conditional appearance settings.

6.4.4.1. Saving Settings between Sessions The settings of sorting and grouping are not saved between sessions. For example, if a user customized sorting of a list and closed application, records in the list will be sorted by default when the user restarts the software.The settings of conditional appearance are always saved. This means that if a condi-tional appearance is customized once, it will be applied to the list subsequently.The selected settings of a filter are added to the settings available in the list of filter settings defined in the configuration but they will not be used until the user checks them to be used in the created filter setting row.

6.4.5. visibility Interval

For some lists it is possible to limit the displayed data to a specific period. The interval is specified in the Period setting dialog opened using All Actions – Set date range.

Page 78: enterprise manual 1c

78 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 65. Customization of a period in a list

By default, the data in a list are displayed without any limitation by period and the Date period parameter has the value Without limitations.To define a custom date range, select Custom period in the Date range list and specify the start and end dates in the fields From: and To: as shown on fig. 65.It is also possible to select one of the standard periods that also support automatic tracking of date changes. For example, if you select Today as the standard period on the 12th of May, 2009, the next day the filter will still be valid because it will point to the 13th of May, 2009.If you check Use this period setting at startup, the form will be opened with the selected visibility interval.

6.5. prInt lISt

To export a list to a text or spreadsheet document, select All Actions – Output List.In the dialog that opens, select the type of the document and the required columns.

Fig. 66. List output customization dialog

If the list supports multiple row selection, you can use this dialog to only print the selected rows (Selected only check box).If a hierarchical list is displayed in a table, in the dialog box you can specify the mode of printing data with all the subordinate folders and items (With subordinates check box).

Page 79: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 7

ManaGeMent of VarIous data types

This chapter covers features used to manage such data as documents and document journal as well as information on specific properties of infobase objects.

7.1. IteM nuMBerIng

One of the required attributes of a configuration object is its code (number for documents).Depending on the configuration, an item code can be assigned automatically or manually when the item is created.If automatic numbering is defined for a specific object, when the item is saved, the code (number) text box will contain the code (number) generated by the software. This code (number) can be edited but the software will verify that this new code (number) does not match any of the codes (numbers) for objects of the same type that already exist in the system.If the system identifies that this code (number) has already been used, a warning will be displayed.prefix. A prefix of code (number) can be specified for a configuration object. So when an item is created, the subsequent code (number) will be suggested based on the rules of automatic code (number) assignment with the specified prefix as well. However, you can completely change the suggested code (number), including its prefix.

7.2. addIng an eleMent BaSed on

1C:Enterprise supports creation of new items based on existing data.This allows you to raise an invoice using the information from a previously created invoice.

Page 80: enterprise manual 1c

80 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The order for the specific attributes of the template object to be moved to a copied object is defined when such objects are created during configuration development.You can get information about the possibility of a based-on object creation in the configuration description.To add an object based on another object, select a template object in the list, use Create Based On item of the command bar and choose the type of the created object in the dropdown submenu. A form to create a new object of the selected type will be displayed where the attributes will be filled with information copied from the source object.When a document is created, it is assigned the next sequence number. The current date will be used as the document date.

7.3. deletIng (MarKIng for deletIon) an IteM (folder)

There are two deletion modes: direct deletion and marking for deletion. The particular user’s rights determine the availability of the modes. If direct dele-tion is permitted, the responsibility for any violation of infobase reference integrity lies with the administrator who has authorized the use of this mode and the user who has deleted the items referred to in the infobase. As a rule, if it is defined in the specific configuration, the system maintains refer-ence integrity of the infobase objects: in this mode direct deletion of some system objects (such as documents) is not allowed; you can only set an object deletion mark, but you cannot delete the object. The objects are only deleted when the appropriate service procedure is carried out using Delete Marked Objects from the All Features list if this operation is available to the specific end user.To set a deletion mark for an item, place the cursor to the row containing the item and select All Actions – Mark/Unmark for deletion.To unmark an item in a list for deletion, position the cursor in the row containing the previously marked item and select All Actions – Mark/Unmark for Deletion. A conventional icon located in the leftmost column of the list will be changed. The commands to mark and unmark for deletion may also be available in the forms of objects from the All Actions menu.IMPORTANT

When you mark a folder for deletion or unmark it, it applies to all the items in the folder. The same rule applies to items of a subordinate list.

For details on deletion modes (direct deletion, marking and unmarking for dele-tion), see the document "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator guide".

7.4. WorKIng WIth data froM external SourceS

1С:Enterprise supports data from external databases. Depending on the program settings, data from external sources may be viewed, used in the reports and proc-essed through a web client.

Page 81: enterprise manual 1c

81Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types

The system administrator is able to define the general settings for connecting to an external source.A new connection must always be established w henever you try to access data from an external source with no previously existing connection to it. Once such a connection has been successfully established, the activity selected will continue. If the connection parameters have not been specified, the program will display the parameters setting dialog when trying to establish a connection.

Fig. 67. The external data source connection dialog

You are able to store the user name and password and use them in the future with the correct authorization. To save the parameters, select the Remember checkbox. After you have entered the data, the program connects to an external source and displays the following message: Connection to an external data source established. Please repeat action. You can continue working with data from an external source afterwards.

7.5. prInt forM of an oBject

If during configuration development a print form is created for an object in addition to the screen form of a dialog, the dialog for object editing usually contains a button that results in generation of the form. This button is usually labeled Print, though it may have any other similar label.When you click Print (or use any other actions specified in the configuration description), a print form is generated.The generated print form may be opened in a new window of the standard 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor. If only part of the form is visible in the window, the arrow keys and scroll bars can be used to display the remaining portion of the form.If required, an automatically generated print form can be edited. The edit mode should be enabled using Table – View – Edit item of the main menu.An edited print form can be saved to the hard drive file. To do so, select File – Save or File – Save As.Working in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor is described in detail in the Appendix 3 to this Manual (available in electronic version of the documentation).To print a form directly, select File – Print item of the main menu. The standard print setup dialog will open. For details, see "Print Setup" in the Appendix 3.

Page 82: enterprise manual 1c

82 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

7.6. MultIuSer operatIon

When multiple users work in the software, they may attempt to edit the same object. In this case only the user who began editing before everyone else would be able to complete editing of the object. When other users attempt to edit the object, a warning will be displayed featuring the session number and computer name that locked this object. For example:

Fig. 68. Object lock error

To edit a released object, you should reread it from the database.

7.7. docuMentS and docuMent journalS

In 1C:Enterprise information about company’s business operations is recorded in documents. Documents can be displayed in the lists of documents of the same type or in journals. A journal is a list of documents of various types. In general, a table of document journal always includes a column named Document Type that lists names of the documents.

Fig. 69. 'Financial documents' document journal

Page 83: enterprise manual 1c

83Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types

As a rule, the leftmost column in a journal or list of documents is a service one. It shows document status using various icons:

Fig. 70. Status of a document in a journal

Recorded � – the document has been saved (recorded) but has not been posted.Posted � – the document has either been posted or posting is not supported for the document.For deletion � – the document has been marked for deletion.

7.7.1. viewing document journalTo view document journals, use the general methods of working with lists. For details on these methods, see "Viewing a List" on the page 66.If sorting by date mode is selected in a list of document journals, the records are displayed in chronological order when the journal is displayed. The following rules are applied in this situation:

the records in the journal are ordered by date, �the records of the same date are ordered by document time. �

If sorting by date is disabled, the documents are displayed by the input order.

7.7.2. adding a new document from the document journal

If a journal displays documents of multiple types, when a new document is created from the list form, you will be prompted to select the type of the document.

Fig. 71. Prompt to select a document type

This list will only include the names of the document types that are displayed in the current journal.If the appropriate command is provided for in the Create group of the action panel, documents can be entered without opening a journal or list of documents.

In the list of document types, select the required type for the document and click �OK. Next a form for the newly created document will be displayed for you to populate its attributes.

Page 84: enterprise manual 1c

84 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If a journal stores documents of a single type, the list of document types will not be displayed; instead, the document attributes entry dialog box will be displayed immediately.

7.7.3. document date and time

Almost all the documents have fields to enter their dates and numbers. Specifying the document time is an important specific feature of the 1C:Enterprise. Documents are arranged chronologically and often they are processed in the chronological order specified by the document’s date and time. Thus, a document’s time is used not only to display the astronomic time when the document was input into the system, but mostly to order the documents of the same date.The date suggested by the system can be changed. When a document is recorded, normally the current time is assigned.

7.7.4. posting a document

Posting a document is an action that reflects the document data in various accounting mechanisms based on the data contained in the document. Postability is a predefined property of a document. When a document is posted, the informa-tion contained in the document is recorded in various registers by creating register records. Register records represent the information about how the register state changes as a result of document posting.When you click the button in the document form that is intended to post the docu-ment (usually it is Post and Close or Post), the document is posted and closed. A posted document will be marked in the document journal with a special icon (see fig. 72).In some cases, when posting a document is attempted, a situation arises that prevents the document from being posted. For example, when posting an invoice it is discovered that there is an insufficient quantity of the required goods in the ware-house. A message will be displayed informing the user that the document cannot be posted. In this situation the document will not be closed automatically. You can edit the document and reattempt to post it.To unpost a document, select All Actions – Clear Posting. After a confirmation, the icon next to the document will change (see fig. 72).

Fig. 72. Document posted status

Page 85: enterprise manual 1c

85Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types

When a document is unposted, unless otherwise defined in the configuration, all the actions applied by the document during posting are cancelled.An unposted document can be edited, recorded, posted (or not posted). The icon in the leftmost column correctly reflects the current status of the document.

7.7.5. unpostable documents

Documents that are not intended to be posted in this configuration are not posted but they are marked with the same icon in the lists of documents that is used for posted documents. You cannot unpost unpostable documents (see fig. 73).

Fig. 73. List of unpostable documents

7.7.6. viewing document register records

To analyze the changes that a posted document has caused in the registers, a configuration may specify for viewing of the register records. The way the register records are viewed is specified in the configuration description.The form used to view register records is a list. This list displays register records. The assortment of columns in the list depends on the structure of the selected register. The form of viewing accumulation register records can be as follows:

Fig. 74. Accumulation register

Page 86: enterprise manual 1c

86 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The register list form always has two mandatory columns.The Row number column may include the number of the record in the register record set that is created when the document is processed. The Period column features a special icon that demonstrates the nature of the changes applied to this register. A + (plus) sign denotes an increase of the abso-lute value of the register dimension while - (minus) sign demonstrates a decrease. In the above example, it is the + (plus) sign that shows that the quantity of goods has increased.

7.8. BuSIneSS proceSSeS

Business processes in 1C:Enterprise are intended to combine individual opera-tions into chains of interrelated actions, allowing specific goals to be achieved. For example, the issuance of an invoice, acceptance of cash payment, and shipment of goods from a warehouse can be combined into the Sale of goods business process.Such chains of interrelated operations within a business process are presented in the business process route map. A route map (flowchart) describes the logic of the business process and its entire life cycle, from start to finish, in the form of a map of the passing sequence for interrelated points in the process.A route point reflects a stage in the life cycle of a business process, normally involving performance of a single automatic or manual operation.Tasks in 1C:Enterprise allow you to keep a record of jobs sorted by performer, and reflect the progress of business processes through the flowchart. In addition to busi-ness processes, tasks can be created by other infobase objects or directly by users.When a business process reaches any route point where actions of a specific performer are defined, a task is generated (or multiple tasks for a group action). When the performer marks the task as executed, the business process automatically passes to the next route point in compliance with the flowchart. Thus, tasks are the driving force for business processes.The specific business processes and their interconnection with tasks are described in the configuration description.The general principles of working with business processes and tasks are similar to working with other objects (for example, documents and lists), therefore we will cover specific features in this Manual.

7.8.1. list of Business processes

By default, a list of business processes displays the following information:Date � – date and time of business process creation;Number � – number (unique to a business process);Started � is a mark showing that the business process has been started;

Page 87: enterprise manual 1c

87Chapter 7. Management of Various Data Types

Completed � – business process completion mark (all the tasks generated by the business process have been executed);Head task � – the task on the basis of which the business process has been created.

The list of business processes Sale of goods may look as follows:

Fig. 75. List of business processes 'sale of goods'

Business process statuses are marked by the icons:

Fig. 76. Status of a business process

If a business process has not been started yet ( there are no tasks associated with this process and the Started mark is not set), this icon is shown in black and white, and not in color. Completed – a business process is considered to be completed when it reaches the end point on the flowchart, with all corresponding tasks executed.

7.8.2. list of tasks

By default, a list of tasks displays the following information:Number � – number (unique to a task);Name � – task name;Date � – date and time of task creation;Completed � – task completion mark;Business process � – the business process that has generated this task;Point � – the business process route point where the task was created.

In addition to the above data, it is possible to define additional columns to display values of any other business process or task attributes.

Page 88: enterprise manual 1c

88 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Task statuses are marked by icons:

Fig. 77. Task status

7.8.3. executing a task

Task execution is an important stage of a business process life cycle. When a task is executed, its business process passes to the next route point in compliance with the flowchart, which results in generating new tasks within this business process. To execute a task, select All Actions – Completed for the required task from the task form.The system may provide for opening of additional windows during task execution, for example, to display warning messages or to enter additional information. An execution check can also be specified. This check can prohibit execution of a task if certain conditions are not complied with (for example, if the document is not approved or if a discount is not applied to an invoice). The executed tasks are marked with a special icon and have the Completed check box checked.

Page 89: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 8

reports

Reports are used to obtain data from the 1C:Enterprise infobase. In the 1C:Enterprise mode a user may generate a report with the suggested settings or customize the settings. Experienced users may also develop their own report variants.The default appearance of a report form is shown below:

Fig. 78. Report form

To generate a report with the predefined settings, it is sufficient to click Generate button on the report command bar.If multiple variants are provided for a report, you will have to select the required variant before this operation. This is done using Select variant button in the report form. For details on working with variants, see "Report Variants" on the page 92.In order to customize a report settings, you can use either the quick settings field or a dedicated dialog opened with the Setup... button. For details on the settings, see "Using Quick Settings" and "Settings" below.Once a report’s result is generated by the system and exported to a spreadsheet document, you can use the details mechanism. For details see "Working with Report Details" on the page 99.

Page 90: enterprise manual 1c

90 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Depending on the report settings, a report form may include the following commands in the All Actions submenu:

Settings � – opens a form of settings;Select setting � – opens the form to select a previously saved setting;Save setting � – saves the changed report settings;Set standard settings � – loads the settings from the report variant;Change variant � – opens the window to customize the report variant;Select variant � – opens the form to select a report variant;Save variant � – opens the form to save the report variant;Change form � – opens the form used to customize the report form;Open new window � – opens a new report form with current settings.

For details on working with settings, see "Using Quick Settings" section and "Changing Report Variant" below.The procedure used to work with report details is described in "Working with Report Details" on the page 99.

NOTE

Forms with hidden system commands are shown in fig. 78 and the other illustra-tions in the examples below.

8.1. report Setup

Some report settings may be edited in a dedicated form. When a report is processed, these settings are used together with the main report settings. To open a form where you will be able to edit settings, click Settings… in the report form.

Fig. 79. Setup form for 'Sales Trends' report

To save the selected settings, click Finish editing.To edit the settings displayed in the report form, select All actions – Change settings set. The settings list editing form then opens in a new window.

Page 91: enterprise manual 1c

91Chapter 8. Reports

Fig. 80. Changing the report settings set

All available report settings are displayed on the left, and the settings edited in the report form are shown on the right. To manage a set of user settings, use the following buttons:

Add > � – adds a setting from the list on the left to the right. Add all >> � – adds all settings from the list on the left to the right. < Delete � – deletes the setting from the list on the right. << Delete all � – deletes all settings from the list on the right.

To restore a standard user settings list, use the All actions – Set standard settings command.If the settings do not result in generation of the required report, you can create your own report variant. You need to have some experience with reports to be able to create a report variant. For details on working with report variants, see "Editing a Report Variant" on the page 105.When a report form is closed or current report variant is changed, custom settings are saved automatically. Custom settings are saved independently for every report variant.It is possible to select some settings that will be edited most frequently (for example, filter by goods in the Sales Trends report or filter by company in the accounting report). These settings will be edited directly in the report form.If you set filter in the report settings form, a filter element will be added to the settings list and the settings displayed in the report form.To use a selected setting in a report, define the value for the setting in the respective column.Based on the type of the setting, you should either left-click the column containing its value or use one of the following actions:

Select a value from the list that pops up when you click � Select,Specify a value in the new window that is displayed when you click � Select in the column of setting value.

Page 92: enterprise manual 1c

92 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

A sample of a report setting is shown below:

Fig. 81. Selecting a value of quick report setting

A report is not generated when settings are edited.To generate a report with the defined settings, click Generate.To disable use of the selected setting in a report, uncheck it in the respective row.

8.2. report varIantS

Multiple variants may be created for a report. A variant defines the view for the data to be displayed as a result of the report. For example, for a Sales Trends report you can create a variant where the data on sales of goods by periods are displayed as a chart and another variant where data on sales by customers are displayed as a table. At that each report variant has its own set of settings.The system enables you to create a new report variant directly in the 1C:Enterprise mode. Before you do this, carefully study "Editing a Report Variant". If this action is initiated, a new report variant is saved in the infobase.It is possible to define multiple versions of settings for every report.For details on working with versions of settings, see "Editing a Report Variant" on the page 105.

8.3. WorKIng WIth reportS

Let us consider in details user’s work with a report using Sales Trends report of the demo configuration as an example. Let us initiate the report using the respective command on the action panel. The report form will be opened in a new window. When the report is initiated, Chart by Periods is selected as a variant for the report. Suppose we need another variant.

Page 93: enterprise manual 1c

93Chapter 8. Reports

Fig. 82. 'Sales Trends' report form

Now let us click Select variant… and select Sales of Goods by Customers report variant in the new window.

Fig. 83. Selecting a report variant for the 'Sales Trends' report

Fig. 84. 'Sales Trends' report in the variant 'Sales of goods by customers'

Page 94: enterprise manual 1c

94 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Note that the following settings have been selected for this report variant: Period – Current Year and grouping by the fields Good and Customer. Suppose these are the settings we currently need and generate the report by clicking Generate (see fig. 83).Note

A table header is fixed automatically to simplify working in the reports with a single table or group.

8.3.1. using quick Settings

Suppose we want to obtain a report on sales over the previous year. To do so, we need to change the Period parameter and click Generate:

Fig. 85. 'Sales Trends' report for the previous year

8.3.2. Settings

Suppose it is not sufficient to change the visible parameters (Period and Group). To view the parameters that can be customized for the report variant, click Setup. A list of settings will open in a new window.

Fig. 86. Setup form for ‘Sales Trends’ report

Page 95: enterprise manual 1c

95Chapter 8. Reports

8.3.2.1. FilterTo apply a filter, define a value for the filter in the settings form. To do so, select the Value column in the item row and click Select or press F4.

Fig. 87. Filter setup form for ‘Sales Trends’ report

1. In the window that opens click Add New Item or drag a field from the list of Available Fields.

2. Select Comparison Type from the list that pops up when you click Select.3. Define a filter value by selecting it from the list that opens when you click

Select or enter it to the column.4. If required, define the order for the filter items with Move up and Move down

buttons.5. Click ОK.For details on using filters and the comparison types, see "Filter" section on the page 116.

8.3.2.2. SortingTo define an order of records in the report results, in the setup form select Value in the Sorting row and click Select or press F4.

Fig. 88. Sorting setup for 'Sales Trends' report results

Page 96: enterprise manual 1c

96 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

1. In the window that opens click Add New Item and select the field or drag a field from the list of Available Fields.

2. Select Sort direction (Ascending / Descending).3. If required, define the order for the sorting items with Move up and Move down

buttons. 4. Click ОK.If multiple sorting fields exist, the data in a report will be sorted initially by the first field followed by the second field, etc. For details on working with sorting, see "Sorting" on the page 119.

Sample Sorting SetupFor example, let us sort the Report on Payments by supplier and by document dates for every supplier. The filter settings will look as follows:

Fig. 89. Setup of report sorting

In the editing form click OK. The resulting report will look as shown below:

Fig. 90. Result of report sorting setup

8.3.2.3. Conditional AppearanceTo define a conditional appearance for report result records, in the settings form select Value in the Conditional Appearance row and click selection button or press F4 (see fig. 91).1. In the window that opens click Add.2. Select the required appearance parameters on the Appearance tab: background

color, font color, etc.3. Specify the condition for formatting to be applied to the fields on the Condition

tab. A condition is specified in the same manner as it is for filter.

Page 97: enterprise manual 1c

97Chapter 8. Reports

4. On the Formatted fields tab from the list of available fields select those fields for appearance to be applied to if the condition is satisfied.

5. If required, define the order for the used appearance elements with Move up and Move down buttons. The order of appearance elements defines the sequence for appearance to be applied to report elements. If two different appearances apply to a report area, the one that is the last in the list of conditional appearance elements is applied.

6. Click ОK.

Fig. 91. Conditional appearance of a report setup

For details on conditional appearance customization, see "Conditional Appearance" on the page 119.

Sample Conditional Appearance SetupFor example, let us select the documents associated with OOO Zhivotnovodstvo from the Report on Mutual Settlements. To do so, in the report settings we will proceed as follows:1. Add a new item on the Conditional Appearance tab.2. In the dialog for editing a conditional appearance item on the Appearance tab

we will click Select and in the Font selection dialog check Bold in the Font style group.

Page 98: enterprise manual 1c

98 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3. On the Condition tab we will add a new item as follows: Document.Company Equals OOO Zhivotnovodstvo.

4. Click ОK and make sure that <All fields> is displayed in the Formatted fields.The setting for a conditional appearance of a report will look as shown below:

Fig. 92. Sample conditional appearance setup

In the variant customization dialog click Finish editing. The report will change to the view shown below:

Fig. 93. Conditional appearance of a report setup

8.3.2.4. GroupingTo define a grouping of report results, in the setup form select Value in the Grouping row and click selection button or press F4.

Fig. 94. Report grouping setup

Page 99: enterprise manual 1c

99Chapter 8. Reports

1. Click Add.2. In the window that opens select Grouping field and define the type for the

grouping: No hierarchy ○ – the group will only include non-hierarchical records (items); Hierarchy ○ – the group will include both hierarchical and non-hierarchical records (items and folders); Hierarchy only ○ – the group will only display hierarchical records (folders).

3. Click ОK.4. If required, define the order for the groupings with Move up and Move down

buttons.5. Click ОK in the grouping editing window.For details on working with grouping, see "Grouped Fields" on the page 112.

Sample Grouping SetupFor example, let us group the result of Report on Payments by the name of supplier. To do so, we will select Supplier field with Hierarchy type as the field to group by.The result of report output is shown below:

Fig. 95. Report on payments grouped by 'Supplier' field

8.4. WorKIng WIth report detaIlS

When you mouse-over a cell of a report result, the cursor will change its shape if details are possible for the cell (see the figure). If you now double-click this cell, the details menu will be displayed.Double-clicking this cell opens the cell’s value in a new window, while double-clicking the cell with resources prompts you to select a field for entering the details, after which the details are created.

Page 100: enterprise manual 1c

100 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Right-clicking always displays a details menu.

Fig. 96. Details menu for a report cell

Drill down – view detailed information on the content of the field. All the details are displayed in a new window.For example, let us find out when kettles Bosch15 were sold. To do so, in the already generated Sales Trends we will select the cell Bosch15 and open Drill down. In the field selection window that opens we should select Period.

Fig. 97. Selecting a field for report details

Page 101: enterprise manual 1c

101Chapter 8. Reports

Click Select. The details will open in a new window.

Fig. 98. Report details

The command Open "…" will open the viewing form for the data displayed in the cell. For example, a window containing a form of the list item.

Fig. 99. Form of a list item

Filter – enables filtering of the current report structure item by the value of the selected field or defining a filter by the value of another field (use Advanced and specify a filter condition). For example, let us filter out the rows of the report with Amount (Turnover) over 50,000:

Fig. 100. Filter condition editing dialog

Page 102: enterprise manual 1c

102 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The result is displayed in a new window.

Fig. 101. Filter result

Order – applies ordering of the current report item content by the value of the current field. Clicking Advanced enables you to specify an arbitrary field. For example, the table of the report may be ordered by the Good field.

Fig. 102. Result of report ordering

Group – selects a field and defines a type of grouping in the current item of the report structure. For example, from the Balance of Goods report we need to find out what shoes are available in which warehouse. To do so, let us select Warehouse grouping field.

Fig. 103. Selecting a grouping field

Page 103: enterprise manual 1c

103Chapter 8. Reports

Let us filter by the value Good in Group Shoes. The result of the report is shown below:

Fig. 104. Result of report grouping

Format – makes it possible to specify a condition for an appearance to be applied and customize appearance for the current report item. For example, we should format the fields where Quantity Balance < 10 items.

Fig. 105. Report appearance example

Page 104: enterprise manual 1c

104 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 105: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 9

edItInG a report VarIant

It is only recommended to edit report variants for experience users familiar with report setup in the data composition system. To edit the report type, use the All actions – Change variant… command.This will open a report variant form.

Fig. 106. Report variant setup form

The process of report variant customization is the process of changing report struc-ture and selecting required parameters, creating custom fields, specifying fields to group by, to filter by and to sort by for every report item.

Page 106: enterprise manual 1c

106 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

At any moment you can return an edited report customization variant to the initial view using All Actions – Standard settings.All Actions – Save settings is intended to save report settings to a file.You can load settings from a file using All Actions – Load settings. Settings are loaded in compliance with the access rights of the current user.The Change Form command of the All Actions menu is designed to edit the form of report variant customization itself. For details on form customization, see "Form Setup" on the page 147.

9.1. general report cuStoMIzatIon

To apply settings to the entire report, select the node Report in the report structure as shown on fig. 106. The assortment of settings (and their respective tabs) depends on available fields and selected customization item.

Fig. 107. Report variant customization

9.2. changIng report Structure

In the data composition system report items may include groups, table, chart, and a nested report.

Page 107: enterprise manual 1c

107Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

Grouping – displays data as a list. To add a grouping to a report, select Add – New Grouping or press Ins. In the window that opens select a field to group by and the type of grouping as shown below:

Fig. 108. Grouping customiztion form

If no field to group by is selected, the report will have detailed records added. These are the records obtained from the database ordered same as they are in the database.In the simplest case when you add a grouping by the field Good the report will look as shown below.

Fig. 109. Grouping in a report

Tip

You can also select structure elements that should be joined into groups and use All Actions – Group.

The Ungroup command removes a grouping but keeps its content. Table – displays data as a table. To add a table to the structure, select Add – New table. Groupings are used for rows and columns of such a table.For example, a report structure may have a table created where the list of goods will serve as its rows while the columns will display data on the balance of goods in the warehouse (see the picture below).

Page 108: enterprise manual 1c

108 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 110. Table in a report structure

Chart – displays the data as a chart. To add a chart into the structure, select Add – New chart. You can use points and series depending on the type of chart. One or several resources may be specified as values (of the selected fields) according to the application settings.

Fig. 111. Chart in a report structure

Nested report – if a nested report was created for the report at the configuration stage, it can also be used as an element in the report structure.

Tip

The commands that are most frequently used for operations on the report structure can also be opened from the context menu of the Structures field.

To remove an item from a structure, select it in the structure field and click Delete or press Del.

Page 109: enterprise manual 1c

109Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

9.2.1. customization of report Structure Item

To customize a specific item of the report structure, select this item in the structure and on the setup tab check Current item has individual settings <setting name> (for detailed item customization).Note that customization scope depends on the type of the item:

The following can be customized for a � Grouping item: Grouped Fields, Selected fields, Filter, Sorting, Conditional Appearance, Additional settings;The following can be customized for a � Table and a Chart: Selected fields, Conditional Appearance, Additional settings.

Note

If a nested report is available in the report settings, note that settings for the reports are separated.

9.2.2. Setting elements

9.2.2.1. Available fieldsThe list of available fields (see fig. 112) allows to easily select available fields and move it to the lists of fields to group by, to select, to filter by, to sort by using standard drag and drop operations. Using All Actions menu for the available fields, you can select the current field or all the available fields to locate them to the corre-sponding collection (Select All will select all the fields that are on the same level with the current row in the tree of available fields; folders are not selected). The list of available fields includes: fields, resource fields and folders of fields.

Fig. 112. The list of available report fields

The following nested fields may be used for each number resource in the report:% in a row or series � : contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell to the row total resource value in the table output. In the non-table output it shows 100 %.% in a column or point � : contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell to the row total resource value in the table output. In the non-table output the field value is equal to the field "Overall %".

Page 110: enterprise manual 1c

110 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

% in a group by row or series � : contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell to the current group total resource value in the table output. In the non-table output it shows 100 %.% in a group by column or point � : contains the ratio of the resource value in the current cell to the total resource value for the current group by column, which is equal to the field "% in a group" in the table output. In the non-table output the field value is equal to the field "% in a group".% in a hierarchy group by row or series � : contains the ratio between the resource value in the current cell to the total resource value at the current hierarchy level in the current group by row in the table output. In the non-table output it shows 100 %.% in a hierarchy group by column or point � : contains the ratio between the resource value in the current cell to the total resource value at the current hier-archy level in the current group by column, which is equal to the field "% in a hierarchy group" in the table output. In the non-table output the field value is equal to the field "% in a hierarchy group".

When these fields are displayed in a chart, the final field headers contain no refer-ences to rows or columns. For example, the field % in a string or series in the output chart will have a % in a series title.When these fields are displayed in a non-chart object, the final field headers will not contain any references to series or points. For example, the field % in a string or series in the output table will have a % in a series title.

9.2.2.2. ParametersIf a report has some customizable parameters, they will be displayed in the list of available fields in the Parameters folder and will be available to include them into a report and to exclude them as well as to select a value (if multiple values were assigned to a parameter) on the Parameters tab. For example if a period is used for a report to be generated, the value for the report should be selected by the user.

Fig. 113. Report parameters in the variant setup form

Parameters can be used as fields in various report settings. When a the report is run, parameter values are substituted to the settings for the fields that use them.

Page 111: enterprise manual 1c

111Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

For example, if a report includes Company as a parameter, the field Parameters.Company will be available in the filter. When this field is selected as a value for a filter, Company will be used as a value for the parameter. For a Date parameter you can both use a specific date and one of the standard dates as its value: Beginning of this day, Beginning of next day, etc.

9.2.2.3. Custom FieldsThe Custom fields tab allows you to create fields to be used in a report. To insert a custom field into a report, add it to the list of selected fields. At that ability to use a custom field in a report item is defined automatically.There are two types of custom fields: selection field or expression field.

Fig. 114. Custom fields in report variant settings

A selection field may have multiple values. The first value to satisfy the filter condition will be selected to record to a report. Specify a title and expression for the filter, value and short filter presentation if required.

Fig. 115. Report setup. Custom selection field

Filter conditions are defined in a new window and are added using the Add button. Next select a field from the list of available fields, Comparison type and define a Value for comparison.To define an order of the filter items, use the arrows on the command bar or drag an item to the required row with your mouse.

Page 112: enterprise manual 1c

112 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

A custom expression field will be displayed in a report as a resulting value of expressions. Expressions are composed using Available fields of a report and the expressions of the data composition system language. Custom fields may be used in any location within a report. Custom resource fields cannot be used as a field to group by.In the Edit custom field dialog select a title and expressions for detailed and resulting records.

Fig. 116. Custom expression field

The names of the fields containing spaces and/or special characters, should be enclosed in square brackets [].Expression for total records should be written using statistical functions, e.g.: Amount (Field) * 2.For details on data composition language, see Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expressions Language (available in electronic version of the documenta-tion).

9.2.2.4. Grouped FieldsOn the Grouped Fields tab, you can select fields to group by and the type of grouping.

Fig. 117. Grouped fields in the report item

Page 113: enterprise manual 1c

113Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

A grouping may have one of the following types:No hierarchy � – the group will only include non-hierarchical records (items). Hierarchy � – the group will include both hierarchical and non-hierarchical records (items and folders).Hierarchy only � – the group will only display hierarchical records (folders).

The menu allows to add a new field or a new auto field.

Auto field of groupingA grouped auto field is a set of fields that are generated automatically following the rule below. The fields used in the report are selected provided that they are:

Available to use in the fields to group by, �Are not resources, �Are not attributes of other selected fields, �Are not attributes of existing fields to group by. �

To view the set of fields that the auto field of grouping will be transformed into when the report is run, select All Actions – Expand.If a field is already included in the data of the grouping field, it will not be added repeatedly.If available types of the grouping field include date, it is possible to customize period addition (to include the dates that do not fall into the result into the report). For example, if you want the data for all the weeks to be included into a report, select Week as an addition type and choose the start and end dates of the period as shown below.

Fig. 118. Customization of group by addition

Let us illustrate this with an example. Suppose the Mutual Settlements report includes the data on mutual settlements with stores named "Butcher Shop" and "Groceries" for the period from the 1st of January, 2009 to the 31st of December, 2009.

Fig. 119. Report without addition

Page 114: enterprise manual 1c

114 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

At that you now need to display data by the quarters. To do so, we will need to specify an Addition for the Period, month on the Grouping tab.

Fig. 120. Setup of report addition

This will result in the Mutual Settlements report changing as follows:

Fig. 121. Report with an Addition

9.2.2.5. FieldsThe Fields tab is intended to select the fields to be displayed in the report. If no fields are selected, an empty item is included into the report. Using menu or context menu, you can add a new field, a field group or an auto field. A field group can be named and you can also manage their location in the current report item.

Page 115: enterprise manual 1c

115Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

Fig. 122. Report setup. Fields

9.2.2.6. Selection AutofieldYou can use automatic field sets as fields during system customization. When creating report structure elements, the system automatically adds an <Auto> field as a selection field. Selection autofield is a set of fields to be converted to when creating a report. To view a set of fields, use the All actions – Expand command. If you need to add an autofield, use the New autofield button.When a selection autofield is expanded, it is transformed into a set of selected fields. The assortment of the set of fields depends on the structure item the expanded auto field belongs to and the part of structure this item is located in. For every item, the system passes through all the parent items of the report structure and selects the resources and fields from the selected fields of these items following these rules:

For a � grouping and a table grouping an auto field is replaced with all the used fields of the grouping that are available for use in the selected fields; the fields that are attributes of its grouping fields and resources of parent items.

Warning!

In the process the system only takes into account the groupings of the types No hierarchy or Hierarchy.

For a � chart grouping the resources are not selected. Instead, all the parent items of the settings structure are passed and the grouping fields are selected among the selected fields of these items if Only hierarchy grouping has been defined for this grouping.For � groupings of the type Detailed records (grouping, table grouping, chart grouping) all the used fields are selected from the main selected fields of settings the grouping belongs to except for the fields that participated in the above grouping and attributes of these fields. It the grouping is of the Hierarchy only type, its fields and attributes will be used by the system when a set of selec-tion fields is generated. Resources are not selected for a chart grouping either.

Page 116: enterprise manual 1c

116 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

In a � chart, a selection autofield is replaced with all the resources specified for the chart. Depending on the application settings, the selection autofield may be replaced with the resource that occurred first during the abovementioned itera-tion.For a � table a selection auto field is converted to a set of resources used by the parent items.

NOTE

If a field is already included in the data of the selected field, it will not be added repeatedly.

At that the fields are added into a set as follows: first the fields of the grouping’s own fields (for groupings), next fields of the global settings (for Detailed records groupings) while the last to be added are the resources and fields of the parent items.The selected fields can be joined into groups that are added using Group command (for the command to be available, all the highlighted rows of the table should share the parent). Ungroup command is used to delete the fields while nested fields are preserved. For a group you can define a location within the current item of the report structure. To do so, select the required location type from the list in the Location column.

9.2.2.7. FilterOn the Filter tab, you can select the fields to filter records of the report result. Using the menu, the context menu or by double-clicking any of the selected fields among the available fields you can add an item or a folder of items. Here you can select a filter from those predefined by the developer or add another filter.

Fig. 123. Report item setup. Filter presentation

When you use All Actions – Detailed, this tab will display the filter conditions along with their presentations.

Page 117: enterprise manual 1c

117Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

Fig. 124. Report item setup. Filter

In this tab's columns, you can specify values for the records of the report result to be filtered by. presentation. Using Define presentation command of the context menu, you can define a presentation for the created item or folder of a filter. This presentation will display the information on the filter item in a list if the Details button on the command bar is not clicked. If no presentation was defined for a filter, its detailed presentation will be the same as non-detailed presentation on the Filter tab.Application. For a grouping, grouping in a table and grouping in a chart, there is another available property for the filter items – Application.

Fig. 125. Application setup for a filter item

If Application has the value Hierarchy, the filter condition is checked after hierarchy is composed. Hierarchy only as a value demonstrates that the filter condition is only checked for the hierarchical records. Filtered records still influence the resulting values of the resources of the superior hierarchical records. The nested groups of records that are filtered by these properties, will also be included into the report.

Comparison typesThis section describes the types of comparison that are available for filters.Equal to – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value equal to the right value.Not Equal – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value not equal to the right value.Less Than – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value less than the right value.Less than or Equal – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value less or equal to the right value.

Page 118: enterprise manual 1c

118 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Greater Than – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value higher than the right value.Greater than or Equal – the result will include the records with the value of the field defined as the left value higher or equal to the right value.In a list – the result will include the records containing the fields having the value available in a list. The list of values is defined in a new window that is opened when you select the Left Value column.In a group from the list – the result will include the records with their values belonging to a folder available in the list. The list of groups is defined in a new window that is opened upon selection.In a group – the resulting document will include the records with their left value field being in the specified folder of the list items.In a group from the list – all entries whose values refer to the groups in the list or which are specified in the list will be output. A list of groups and elements is created in a separate window that opens during selection.Not in list – the result will include the records that do not contain the fields having the value available in a list. The list of values is defined in a new window that is opened when you select the Left Value column.Not a group from the list – the resulting document will include the records with their left value field being in the specified folder of the list items.Contains – the result will include the records that contain the substring that is used as the value.Does not contai – the result will include the records that do not contain the substring that is used as the value.Filled – the result will include the records that have the specified field populated.Not filled – the result will include the records that have the specified field unpopu-lated.

Joining Filter ConditionsThe filter conditions may be combined into logical groups using AND, NOT or into groups using OR. To combine conditions, select them and click Group conditions:

If the conditions are joined with � AND, the report will include the data that satisfy all the conditions in the group.If the conditions are combined with � NOT, the resulting document will not include the records that meet all the conditions of the group.If the filters are joined with � OR, the data will be recorded if at least one of the conditions is satisfied. Using context menu you can define presentations for groups. If a group has a presentation, the nested folders will not be displayed in the short mode.

Page 119: enterprise manual 1c

119Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

9.2.2.8. Sorting On the Sorting tab, you can select the fields to sort report results by. You can add an order element or an auto order element. When a report is executed, the system transforms (expands) an order auto item into the fields it will sort by.

Fig. 126. Fields to sort by for a report item

For an order auto item the All Actions menu includes Expand command that is intended to view the set of fields that this field will be transformed into when the report is executed. When an auto item (of order) is expanded, resource fields will be unconditionally added from the global order while those fields that are not resource fields will be added to the order that are the attributes of the grouping field and the grouping field will be added itself (all the fields will be added for the detailed records). The grouping fields that were not specified in the global order, will be located in the end of the order.

9.2.2.9. Conditional AppearanceThe Conditional Appearance tab is intended to define formatting for various report items depending on the values of the data recorded into the report. For example, it is possible to apply a specific color to negative values, etc. Multiple structure items can be formatted in this manner. At that areas to be formatted are defined for every item.Conditional appearance can include multiple items. Every item describes an area to be formatted.An area is a list of fields that are selected from the list of available fields. If no area is specified, conditional appearance will be applied to the entire report item.For every area you can specify conditions that will cause the selected formatting to be applied to the area.The conditions to select fields are specified in a new window that is similar to the filter window of the custom selection field. For details on filters, see page 116.

Page 120: enterprise manual 1c

120 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If two different appearances apply to an area, the one that is the last in the list of conditional appearance elements is applied.

Fig. 127. Conditional appearance items in the detailed mode

The Format column defines a designation for the conditional appearance of an area that will be used to display this appearance in the list of conditional appearances provided that the button near the Details command of the All Actions menu is not clicked.The conditional appearance parameters are specified in a new window. You can select the color of the background, text, cell borders, the text font in the cell, etc.

Background color � – specifies the color of the background.Text color � – defines the text color for text data.Color in chart � – defines the color of data series in a chart.Border color � – the color to be applied to the border of a data item.Border style � – the color to be applied to the border of items. It is possible to define the type for every border independently. Font � – the font for the text data to be displayed.Indent � – defines an indent for a specific number of characters.Autoindent � – if this option is set to more than 0, indentation will be defined as a product of the grouping level and property value when groupings are displayed.Horizontal Align � – this property selects horizontal alignment of text.Vertical Align � – this property selects vertical alignment of text.Placement � – specifies how text should be displayed if it does not fit into a cell.Text orientation � – a number that defines text tilt angle in cells of groupings and tables.Format � – defines data display format.Mark negatives � – if this property is set to Yes, any negative values will be high-lighted in color in the report output.Mark incomplete � – if this property is set to Yes, any incomplete values will display differently in the report output.

Page 121: enterprise manual 1c

121Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

Minimum width � – a number that defines the minimum number of characters for the width of data display.Maximum width � – a number that defines the maximum number of characters for the width of data display.Minimum height � – a number that defines the minimum number of characters for the height of data display.Maximum height � – a number that defines the maximum number of characters for the height of data display.Text � – arbitrary text describing the data.

9.2.2.10. Additional SettingsThe Additional Settings tab defines display parameters for a selected structure item. For example, for a grouping the tab’s content will be as follows:

Fig. 128. Additional settings of a report item

NOTE 1

When generating a report, the system displays an error message if a nested report has a top-level field for which it is impossible to define a value.

NOTE 2

When you place a Pie type chart in report structure, note that if the points are set and the series are not, the system automatically uses points as series. For Line chart type, if the series are set and the points are not, series are used as points.

9.3. SelectIng SettIngS IteMS

To specify that a setup item should be available in the report setup form, use Custom Settings Item Properties command in the item setup.

Page 122: enterprise manual 1c

122 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

In the custom item setup form you can demonstrate that this is a custom element and also specify a presentation to be used for the item and editing mode (normal, quick access, unavailable), see fig. 129.

Fig. 129. Adding a custom settings item

In the settings structure list, the Custom Settings Item Properties command allows to customize custom settings for the current structure item.Every structure item has its own assortment of customizable items.

Object Customizable ItemsReport Selected fields, order, filter, conditional appearance,

assortment of groupingsGrouping/table grouping/chart grouping Grouping, selected fields,

filter, order, conditional appearance, assortment of nested groupings

Chart Chart, selected fields, conditional appearance, assortment of series groupings, assortment of points groupings

Table Table, selected fields, conditional appearance, assort-ment of rows groupings, assortment of columns groupings

Nested schema Nested report, selected fields, filter, order, conditional appearance, assortment of groupings

Depending on where you use Custom Settings Item Properties, the command allows you to change various settings:

Filter list – the settings for the current item/folders of the filter; �List of output parameters and data parameters – settings for the current param- �eter;Conditional appearance list – settings for the current item of conditional appear- �ance.

Page 123: enterprise manual 1c

123Chapter 9. Editing a Report Variant

Besides, the Preview Custom Settings command available on the report structure command bar (see the figure below), makes it possible to open a modal form that will display the settings along with their default values.

Fig. 130. Custom settings preview

Page 124: enterprise manual 1c

124 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 125: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 10

serVICe features

1C:Enterprise provides various service features for navigation within the applica-tion: links (references), history, favorites.It is also possible to use built-in calculator, calendar, file comparison feature, etc. This chapter covers the above mentioned features.

10.1. lInKS

It is possible to obtain a text link to any software interface section, report, or data processor as well as to infobase objects (documents, items of lists, etc.).The obtained link can be stored and used later for navigation. As the links are text fragments, it is possible to send them to other users by e-mail or using other tools.To obtain a link, use Tools – Get reference item of the main menu or click Get reference of the system commands area.For example, let us obtain a link to the list Sales of the Sales section:

Fig. 131. Obtaining a reference to the sales list

If you want the resulting link to be used in the web browser address bar, click the External button.To copy a link to the clipboard, click Copy to clipboard.To add a link to a favorites list, press Add to favorites.

Page 126: enterprise manual 1c

126 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

To navigate a link, use the Tools – Go to link command, specify the link text saved earlier in the dialog opened and press the Go to button or Enter. To distinguish 1C:Enterprise links from other types of links (http or file), an e1c schema ID is used. If an external 1C:Enterprise link whose beginning does not correspond to that of an infobase navigation link is transferred to the link navigation dialog, an attempt to navigate using its inner part (which is specified after the e1c ID) will be made when you are navigating the link. If the navigation attempt fails, the external link transferred will be navigated instead.

10.2. favorIteS

In 1C:Enterprise, Favorites is a list of links selected by the user for quick access to specific configuration sections, infobase object forms as well as forms of reports and data processors.To add a link to an object to your list of favorites:

From the system commands area select � Favorites – Add to Favorites;Use � Tools – Add to Favorites item of the main menu;When you obtain a link, click the � Add to Favorites button. For details on using links, see "Links" above.

When a link is added to favorites, an appropriate notification will be displayed.To open your list of favorites, click Favorites in the system commands area.

Fig. 132. Favorites

To navigate to a link from the list of favorites, click the Favorites button and select the required link from the list by left-clicking it.

Page 127: enterprise manual 1c

127Chapter 10. Service Features

10.2.1. favorites Setup

To manage the assortment and order of the favorites, use the form that is opened when you select Favorites – Configure favorites in the system commands area.

Fig. 133. Favorite links setup dialog

To navigate to a link, highlight it with your mouse or highlight a row and click the Go button.To arrange the favorites in the list, use the Move current item up and Move current item down buttons.To remove the current favorite item, click the Delete Current Item button.

10.3. hIStorY

1C:Enterprise automatically saves the history of a user's operations for subsequent quick access to recently created or edited infobase objects (documents, items of lists, etc.).When objects are added or edited interactively, these events are displayed as noti-fications and recorded to history (for details on alerts, see "Notifications" in this chapter).The user history is stored in the infobase. The history contains only one record for each infobase object (a record about the subsequent modification replaces the record about the previous modification of this object). A maximum of 200 records can be stored per a specific user. If the number of stored items reaches 200, the oldest history records will be replaced with the new ones.Viewing history. Click the History button in the bottom left corner of the main application window. A list of all events will open (see fig. 134). Left-clicking any event will open the form of the object the event is related to.Search for a history element. To search for an event in the list, right-click anywhere in the list and select Find in the context menu. Search for an event is similar to search in a list. The list of events also supports quick search. Search in lists is described on the page 96. Updating history list. An opened list of events is only read by the software at the moment of opening the window and is not updated in the future. To refresh the history window, close this window and reopen it.

Page 128: enterprise manual 1c

128 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 134. History

10.4. all functIonS

It possible to open all the available forms. This is done using the list displayed when you use All functions command of the main menu. This command is available if the corresponding system parameters option is set and the user is authorized to call this mode (for details, see "System Options" on the page 153).

Fig. 135. The list of all software functions

If a user does not have a right to view a specific object, such an object will not be included in the list.The Standard folder includes standard features (list of active users, event log, etc.). For details on standard features, see the document "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Adminis-trator Guide".To switch to an object, double-click this object in the tree of objects or highlight it in the tree and click the Open button.

Page 129: enterprise manual 1c

129Chapter 10. Service Features

10.5. notIfIcatIonS

Notifications are intended to alert the user about specific actions executed by the application. Notifications can be created by the software or by an application solu-tion developer.A notification is displayed in a window that is attached to the system tray of the operating system. If a notification is associated with some link, its description will also serve as a hyperlink. Clicking the hyperlink opens the object it is linked to. The description will also serve as a hyperlink if this notification is generated auto-matically (when an object is recorded/edited interactively).

Fig. 136. Notification of 'Cash Receipt' document modification

Text � – reason for the notification. If multiple objects are modified, the number of modified objects is specified in brackets.Details � – further description.

A notification window is hidden after a certain delay. But if you hover your mouse over the window, it will stay displayed until you close the window or reposition your cursor away.If multiple different notifications are generated in the process of application opera-tion, the notification text in brackets will include the number of modified objects and the name of the list will be used for details.When the list of notifications is displayed in the information panel, they are aligned right. The latest notification will be displayed near the right border of the panel. If more than five notifications exist, only the last five notifications are displayed.

NOTE

The list of notifications is cleared when you close the main application window.

10.6. MeSSageS

In the process of operation some situations may occur when a requested action cannot be executed. For example, a required field is found to be empty during posting of a document. In these situations it may be possible to notify the user in a specific message window. The message window will include a list of reasons for the occurred error.

Page 130: enterprise manual 1c

130 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Double-clicking in a row of the message list will open a special window with the cursor on the field which was not filled correctly. If the message is not related to any specific field, a standard warning will be displayed. If a message cannot be displayed in the required form table cell, the message will be positioned within the table itself.

Fig. 137. Error messages

If a message is related to an attribute of another infobase object, the form of this object will open and a message with the cursor at the specific field will be displayed in this window.If the message window includes multiple messages, the Back/Forward buttons will be included in the bottom of the window specifying the field with an error. These buttons allow you to navigate between the fields these messages are associated with.When you save an item or post a document, the message window is cleared and populated with new messages generated during the selected action.If data has been searched in the form table, then the table data search will be cancelled and the message displayed in the required cell when a user selects the message.

NOTE

To open and close the message window when you work with a form, press Ctrl + Shift + Z.

10.7. StatuS of a lengthY proceSS

In the process of operation situations may occur when a specific process takes some time. It may happen, for example, when you attempt to post numerous documents or execute resourceful calculations. In this situation a message is displayed demon-strating the status of such a lengthy process, see fig. 138.

Page 131: enterprise manual 1c

131Chapter 10. Service Features

Fig. 138. Status of a process progress

The message automatically extinguishes after some time. The message reappears when you hover your mouse over it. Depending on the configuration, it may be possible to abort the process by pressing Ctrl + Break.

10.8. calculator

To execute simple current calculations, 1C:Enterprise has a built-in calculator. It can be opened in any program mode (except when the program is awaiting a response to a request) by selecting Tools – Calculator.The calculator can be dragged to any part of the screen and its window can be resized. All the controls located in the calculator form change their size in propor-tion to the window size.

Fig. 139. Calculator

The calculator can be used to perform any arithmetic operations, calculate percent-ages and reciprocal values, save numbers, and add or subtract saved values. When inputting values, you can edit the inputted value and delete any digits that were input by mistake.You can use both your mouse and your keyboard to work with the calculator. In terms of functions, this numeric calculator resembles a real calculator.The calculator can save the last 15 calculations. To view the result of any calcula-tion, click the Select from list button located to the right of the text box and select the required calculation.The calculator has 10 memory registers to save values and use them in calculations. To operate the first register, use the buttons MR, M+, M– and MC. Click the MS button to save calculation results in the first register.

Page 132: enterprise manual 1c

132 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The field M = displays the value of the clipboard if the clipboard contains a number.Click the MR button to read a saved value from the first register to the text box. Click the M+ button for the value saved in the first register to be added to calculation results; click the M- button for the value saved in the first register to be subtracted from calculation results. Use the MC button to clear the first register content.To save a number to another register, get the number to the display (by typing it or as a result of calculation). Click Select near the MS button. A list of registers is displayed:

Fig. 140. The list of available registers

To save a number to a register, click the button for this register.To obtain a number from a register, click the button, located next to the MR, M+, and M- buttons, depending on the type of the action, and select the register. You should perform a similar procedure to clear the register (MC button).

Fig. 141. Buttons for operations with registers

The calculator works in various modes. You can select a mode by clicking the Menu button of the calculator (see fig. 138) and selecting the required item from the context menu. Formula calculator and Microcalculator items available in the menu are intended to toggle the respective calculator modes. The Settings item of the context menu is intended to define precision of the calculator. A setup dialog is displayed where the desired number of digits after the decimal point should be specified for presentation of results.

Page 133: enterprise manual 1c

133Chapter 10. Service Features

In the Microcalculator mode, all the actions are performed using the keyboard. The calculator has a simplified form:

Fig. 142. Calculator in the microcalculator mode

Use the keyboard keys to input numbers. Use the C key to clear the text box.Formula calculator. In this mode all the actions are entered into the calculator string sequentially. Brackets can be used to organize a specific sequence of actions and enter complex formulas.

Fig. 143. Formula calculator

The calculator can be opened to select an attribute value of the Number type in the text box by clicking the selection button or pressing F4. With the calculator you can enter more digits after the decimal point than defined for the attribute. Clicking OK rounding off is applied in compliance with established rules. To adjust precision of the calculator, click the Menu button and select Settings. A setup dialog is displayed where the desired number of digits after the decimal point should be specified for presentation of results.

10.8.1. Working with clipboard

For operations with the clipboard, 1C:Enterprise provides an enhanced tool for operations with numbers. In addition to simply copying a number to the clipboard, a number can also be added to the value in the clipboard or subtracted from this value.Normally you can use the M, M+ and M- buttons of the standard command bar to do this. When you click M (or press Shift + Num* keyboard shortcut), the highlighted value is copied to the clipboard. The M+ button (Shift + Num+ keyboard shortcut) adds the currently highlighted value to the value stored in the clipboard.The M- button (Shift + Num- keyboard shortcut) subtracts the current value from the value stored in the clipboard. These actions are available in all the forms for numeric values and also for opera-tions with tables. When working with a spreadsheet document, actions can also be performed with multiple cells simultaneously: for example, you can highlight multiple cells and then copy it or add their sum to the clipboard using the specified actions.

Page 134: enterprise manual 1c

134 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The results in the clipboard can be used in any forms, for example, the values can be inserted using Shift + Ins or the corresponding menu items.A numeric value of the current value stored in the clipboard can be viewed in the formula calculator mode in the M= field.If you want to copy a number from the 1C:Enterprise environment to the Windows calculator or to a Microsoft Office Excel cell, use M, M+, M- commands to save the number instead of the commands that copy the value to the clipboard.Note that for the formula calculator and the immediate window a number is saved in compliance with regional infobase settings but without group separators, while decimal separators are replaced by decimal points. For other clipboard targets, a number is saved with regional operating system settings and without group separators.

10.9. calendar

1C:Enterprise features a built-in calendar. You can open it in any mode of the application by selecting the Tools – Calendar menu item. The calendar is also used to enter dates.

Fig. 144. Calendar window

The window displays the current month's calendar. The month name and the year appear in the window title bar. Below is the weekdays bar. The current date is high-lighted with a red border. You can select a different date with your mouse, a grey border will appear around the selected date, and this date will be displayed in the bottom line of the window. To navigate between months and to change the year, use the buttons available around the window title.

Fig. 145. Navigation buttons

To quickly select the current date, month beginning or end date, or year beginning or end date, we recommend using the context menu that is opened with the button, located in the bottom line to the right of the selected date name.

Page 135: enterprise manual 1c

135Chapter 10. Service Features

Fig. 146. Calendar. Selection context menu

If you click the row containing the name of the month and the year, a list of months available for selection will be displayed. Move the mouse pointer up or down to scroll through the list to the desired value. Select the required row of the list to change the month.

Fig. 147. Calendar. The list of months

You can drag the calendar to any place on the screen and resize its window. At that when the window size is increased, calendars for multiple months are displayed.

Fig. 148. Calendar for three months

Calendars are added when the size of the window is increased in any direction. When the size is decreased, additional calendars are hidden.The calendar can also be located as a form control linked to a specific attribute containing a date. In addition, for the dates located in a form as an text box, the value can be selected using the calendar that is opened by clicking the selection button or pressing F4. The methods for working with these calendars are similar to those described above.

Page 136: enterprise manual 1c

136 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

10.10. fIleS coMparISon

In the file comparison mode, you can compare any two files. Use the File – Compare Files option of the main menu to compare files. A dialog will open where you will be able to select the files to compare.

Fig. 149. Dialog to select files to compare

In the Compare and With fields, specify the names of the files to be compared. You can enter file names manually, select them from the dropdown list or use the Browse button to locate the files in the standard file opening dialog. You can specify any type of the source file in the File Type field of the dialog.Use the As field to specify how the files are to be compared. Text and spreadsheet documents can be compared. Binary comparison is possible. In this case, the comparison result will tell you whether the files are different or not.If files of different types are specified in the fields Compare and C, upon compar-ison the selected files will be cast to the type specified in the As field. And then the actual comparison will be performed, and comparison results will be displayed. If Match Line Splitters is checked, the symbols used as line splitters will be taken into account during comparison.Click OK to initiate the comparison process.If you select Text Document as a comparison type, the selected files will be inter-preted as text documents for comparison, although the Compare and To fields can contain non-text files (according to file extensions). If one or both specified files cannot be interpreted as text files, a binary comparison will be performed.

10.10.1. text files comparison

Check the Ignore Empty Space option to omit space in the comparison for text files.Use the Case Sensitive option for case sensitive comparison. If this option is checked, uppercase and lowercase letters are considered to be different symbols.The Match Line Splitters check box means that line splitters will be taken into account for files comparison.

Page 137: enterprise manual 1c

137Chapter 10. Service Features

Before comparing, the program sequentially attempts to read files in UTF-8, UTF-16 and ANSI encoding. If the files can be read and do not contain 0 when read in ANSI encoding, the application compares them as text documents. If the read attempts fail (or 0 is contained for ANSI), the application compares them as binary data.Upon completion of a text files comparison, a window with a list of differences will open. The compared texts will be located in two columns of this window. Deleted, modified and added (new) strings will be highlighted by different colors in the texts. The window contains a toolbar with the standard 1C:Enterprise text editor search and tab buttons and two buttons specific to the window.

Fig. 150. Text files comparison dialog

These buttons are large arrows pointing up and down. The arrows are intended to navigate to the beginning of the previous or next modified text. They can be used to quickly move to the next or previous differing text.

Fig. 151. Files comparison toolbar

Clicking LF results in line splitters displayed as letters LF and CR in the texts.Text color is used to highlight differences in the compared texts. The text color can be customized (the color setup window is opened when you click the Settings button). By default, deleted text is highlighted in blue, green is used for added text, and modified text is marked in red.The left portion of the window displays the text of the file specified in the Compare field while the right portion is for the file from the To field. Clicking Change Comparison Order button switches the locations of the compared files. When you switch files, color markings will also change. If the left part originally contained deleted text, after switching, this text will be shown in the right file as added text.

Page 138: enterprise manual 1c

138 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

10.10.2. Spreadsheet documents comparison

If you compare spreadsheet documents, a window will be displayed to highlight the differences.

Fig. 152. Spreadsheet documents comparison window

This window consists of two sections (left and right). The source documents are placed in both sections of this window. Use command bar buttons to manage display and customize colors.The Next Difference and Previous Difference buttons take you to the next or previous difference.The differences are highlighted using background and text colors. The meanings of the colors are listed in the legend. Use the Comparison View Settings button to open the differences display settings dialog.

Fig. 153. Differences display options customization

Page 139: enterprise manual 1c

139Chapter 10. Service Features

You can save values of the settings as schemas. To do so, click Save As and enter the name for the settings in the opened dialog. Then click OK.If you have multiple settings schemas, you can select the required one in the Schema field of the settings dialog.To restore the standard color settings, click Default.Differences in cells, rows, properties of rows and columns are shown as background color and text color.Differences in cell combinations are shown with a surrounding frame of the same color as the text.Differences in groupings and named areas are shown with text color. Differences in figures are shown by a surrounding frame of text color, except for rectangles, lines and ovals, which are drawn in text color.Modified, deleted and added rows are displayed in different colors in the window (in both files).For selected cells you can get a detailed report of invisible differences (text, font, format, merger, names, etc.). To do so, click the Details… button.

10.11. error MeSSageS

If an error occurs during application operation, an error message is displayed (it can contain various numbers of buttons where the buttons may also have various purposes). A sample error message is shown below:

Fig. 154. Division by zero error

An error message may also contain the hyperlink Show technical support information and appear as follows:

Fig. 155. An error message

The program will be restarted if you press the Restart button.A separate error log window opens when you click a hyperlink. The log displays information about both the session (the platform version, configuration name, working mode, type of client and localization information) as well as the last

Page 140: enterprise manual 1c

140 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

50 errors during the same session, along with nested errors (the time of the error and other error details are displayed).

Fig. 156. Technical support information.

Should you experience 1C:Enterprise system failure, the system will display a dialog with information on the dump recording process. This dialog closes auto-matically after recording is completed.

Page 141: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 11

software ConfIGuratIon

This chapter covers 1C:Enterprise configuration in details. It is possible to configure the application interface both globally and for every form independently (provided that it is supported by the configuration), to define system options, manage display of text and spreadsheet documents and windows location.

11.1. Interface

1C:Enterprise supports customization of the application interface, including:Desktop �Sections panel �Navigation panel (both for the main and the auxiliary windows) �Action panel �Auxiliary window toolbar �

You can select commands from the lists of available commands and manage their locations.Various setup dialogs are opened from the 1C:Enterprise main menu (Tools – Interface Settings item of the main menu).It is also possible to open the setup window for every panel from this panel's context menu.

11.1.1. desktop

It is possible to define the assortment of forms to be displayed on the desktop. At that you can only manage the forms that are located on the desktop.To open the desktop setup dialog, select Desktop Customization from the context menu of the sections panel on the desktop. You can also open the dialog using the main menu: Tools – Interface setup – Desktop.

Page 142: enterprise manual 1c

142 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Customization is carried out in a dialog consisting of three lists: Available forms and groups of columns named Left column, Right column. The list of Available forms displays the forms that are used neither in the left, nor in the right column.

Fig. 157. Desktop setup dialog

You can drag forms from one list to another using the Add >, Add all >> buttons and move them between columns using the > and < buttons. To remove a form from a column (and move it back to the list of available forms), highlight it in the list and click Remove < or double-click the name of the form in the list. You can also rearrange forms in the columns using Up – Down buttons. The forms are displayed on the desktop in the same order that is specified in the settings.During the customization process, you can cancel the changes made in this session or earlier and recover the configuration settings. To do so, select the Set default settings command from the All Actions menu. This command does not change the command interface immediately. After executing this command you can continue customization. Clicking OK applies the settings.

11.1.2. Sections panel

In the process of Sections Panel customization a user defines a list of commands to navigate to sections. The sections panel setup dialog is opened using Sections panel settings… command of the panel context menu or using the Tools menu (see fig. 158).To add a section to the panel, highlight it in the list of available sections and click Add >. In the setup dialog you can move list items with your mouse and select multiple rows simultaneously.To add all the available sections to the panel, click Add all >>. You can also move sections between lists by double-clicking a section in the list.To remove commands from the panel, use Remove and Remove all buttons.

Page 143: enterprise manual 1c

143Chapter 11. Software Configuration

Fig. 158. Sections panel setup form

The sequence of sections on the panel is managed using the buttons on the command bar of the list of selected items (see fig. 158).You can configure presentation for every section. To do so, highlight an item and select the required presentation mode in the list Show: Picture, Text, Picture and Text.To apply the selected settings and close the form, click OK. This saves the settings in the infobase.

NOTE

If all the sections are removed from the sections panel, it is automatically hidden and the main application window switches to the Desktop.

During the customization process, you can cancel the changes made in this session or earlier and recover the configuration settings. To do so, select All Actions – Set default settings. This command does not change the command interface immedi-ately. After executing this command you can continue customization.

11.1.3. navigation panel

The arrangement of commands on the navigation panel is customized in the Navigation panel setup.

Commands to switch to forms of lists, e.g. � Banks, Contractors.Subordinate sections (for example, on the fig. 159 the current section has the �section named Bank as its subordinate with Our current accounts command defined for it).

All the commands are arranged in groups:Important �Normal �See also �

Page 144: enterprise manual 1c

144 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 159. Navigation Panel Setup

To add a command to the panel, highlight it in the list of available commands and click Add >. To add all the available commands to the panel, click Add all >>. You can also move commands between lists by double-clicking a section in the list. To remove commands from the panel, use Remove and Remove all buttons.The sequence of commands is managed using the arrows on the command bar of the list of selected commands (see fig. 159).To add a command from the list of available commands to the group of selected commands, highlight it and click Add to group.To move a command to a required group in the list of selected commands, highlight the command and click Move to group or drag the command to the required group with your mouse. If a group or a subsection is highlighted at this moment, the operation is applied to all the commands in the group/subsection.The setup dialogs support dragging of commands between lists and multiple selection.

NOTE

If a command is included into a subsection, it can only be moved to another group as part of the subsection it belongs to. For example, on the fig. 158 the Our current accounts command can only be moved to the group Important of the Bank subsection.

The exception is the group See also that may contain any commands.To apply the selected settings and close the form, click OK. Note that the order can only be customized for commands.

11.1.4. action panel

The arrangement of commands on the action panel is customized in the Action panel settings.

Page 145: enterprise manual 1c

145Chapter 11. Software Configuration

Fig. 160. Action Panel Setup

The commands to create new objects (for example, � Contractor) – in the standard New group.The commands to open reports (for example, � Report on Mutual Settlements) – in the standard Reports group.Commands to open data processors – in the standard � Tools group.Other commands created in the configuration. �

Action panel is customized in the same manner as the navigation panel (see above).

11.1.5. System commands area of the Main and auxiliary Windows

To add or remove buttons from the standard command bar of the main or auxiliary windows, click Other buttons. In the menu that opens hover your mouse over Add or Remove buttons and in the displayed menu check or uncheck the name of the command.

Fig. 161. Setup of auxiliary window command bar

Page 146: enterprise manual 1c

146 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

A checked command will be displayed in the system commands area of the window.An unchecked command will be hidden from the area.To resume the initial view of the panel, use Panel reset menu item.

11.1.5.1. Auxiliary Window Toolbar CustomizationThe toolbars of an auxiliary window are customized using the Toolbars setup item of the context menu opened on the command bar of the window.The Toolbars setup dialog contains two tabs.

Toolbars TabThis tab is intended to select and edit toolbars.

Fig. 162. Toolbars setup dialog

Toolbars that are currently displayed on the screen are checked in the toolbar list. Checking the row with a toolbar name will display the selected toolbar while unchecking it will hide the toolbar.When this dialog is opened for the first time, a toolbar list will contain only the system toolbars and those created during configuration development. You can restore edited system toolbars to their original state. To do so, highlight the name of a system panel in the list and click Reset.

Commands TabYou can change the toolbar contents and button location to organize the toolbars more conveniently. Editing is performed using the Commands tab of the Toolbars setup dialog.

Page 147: enterprise manual 1c

147Chapter 11. Software Configuration

Fig. 163. Selecting commands from a category

All of the buttons that can be located on toolbars are divided into several categories for convenience. The list of categories is located in the upper left part of the tab.If you select a category name from the list, a set of buttons that are included in this category is displayed in the right part of the tab. You cannot modify this set.Click a button to learn its purpose. A button description will be displayed in the bottom of the tab.All the actions involved in editing a toolbar are carried out by moving toolbar items with your mouse.Drag a button to a toolbar to add it to this toolbar. Buttons can be added by drag-ging them within a toolbar and between toolbars.To remove a button from a toolbar, move it anywhere in the program window.

11.2. forM Setup

Custom form setup can be available in 1C:Enterprise. Unless otherwise defined in the configuration, using All Actions – Change Form on the form’s command bar will open an editor window (see fig. 164).The left portion displays a structure of form elements as a tree. The right portion displays a list of properties of a selected form element.The content and appearance of a form are defined by the assortment of elements included in the form (that can belong to several types).

groups (several types) �tables �fields (several types) �buttons �

Page 148: enterprise manual 1c

148 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 164. Form Setup

These elements have properties that affect their display on the form. Hierarchy of the elements defines their layout on the form.A user can change the assortment of elements, their positions with respect to each other, their grouping and properties.Relocation of elements. To relocate elements in hierarchy, use the Up and Down buttons or drag an item to the required location with your mouse.Element properties. For every element properties are configured in the form element properties. Description of every property is displayed in the bottom of the panel when this property is highlighted.Visibility Setup. To change visibility of elements on a form (show or hide them), use check boxes near the elements. Note that it is impossible to toggle visibility of the root Form element and form setup button. Also it is impossible to toggle visibility of the command bar that includes the Change Form… button.Creating groups. To add a group to a form, select the Form root element in the structure tree and click Add group. In the group properties select the required type (Standard group, Pages, Command bar).Adding fields. Some fields may have Add fields button available. This means that the data displayed in the field/column have attributes that can also be displayed in the field/column. To add the field attributes to the form, click Add fields and select the required attributes in the window that opens. Applying settings. The settings are applied either when the editor is closed by clicking OK or using the Apply command. At this moment the settings are stored in the infobase so they can be used later when the form is opened.During the customization process, you can cancel the changes made in this session or earlier and recover the form settings defined in the configuration. To do so, select

Page 149: enterprise manual 1c

149Chapter 11. Software Configuration

the Set standard settings command from the All Actions menu. This command does not cause an immediate change of the form. After executing this command you can continue customization. The settings are only applied when you click OK or Apply.

11.2.1. Sample form Setup

Let us consider the procedure of form customization using the form of the Sales document as an example.

Fig. 165. 'Sale' document form

Suppose that we need to display the part number and the supplier of goods in the table named Goods. To do so, we will use All Actions – Change Form in the form of the document.In the setup form we will expand the group named Tabular sections group – Goods, select Goods field and click Add fields as shown below.

Fig. 166. Adding fields in form settings

Page 150: enterprise manual 1c

150 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

In the window that opens select the fields Part Number and Supplier as shown below.

Fig. 167. Selecting fields

And click OK. In the form setup dialog we will also click OK or Apply. The Sales document will change its view as follows:

Fig. 168. 'Sales' document form

Suppose we need to display the region of the supplier of goods. To do so, we will select Supplier field in the form settings and click Add fields. In the window that opens we will select the Region field and click OK. The table structure will change as follows:

Fig. 169. Table structure in the ‘Sales’ document

Page 151: enterprise manual 1c

151Chapter 11. Software Configuration

Now let us group the columns of the table. To do so, we will create two groups in the Goods table (by clicking Add group). One of the groups will display the information about the goods: fields Goods and Part Number. The other group will display the information on the supplier: Supplier and Region fields. Now let us define an order for display of fields in the columns using the arrows on the setup form panel. The structure of the document table will change as follows:

Fig. 170. Table structure in the 'Sales' document

And the modified form will look as shown below:

Fig. 171. 'Sales' document form

When the quantity of goods is changed in the Quantity column, the row sum and the total document sum are recalculated automatically. This means that the Recalculate button is not needed. Let us hide the Recalculate button in the form settings by

Page 152: enterprise manual 1c

152 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

unchecking visibility near the Recalculate button as shown on the fig. 172 and click OK.

Fig. 172. Selecting invisibility for recalculate button

The command bar of the document form will look as follows:

Fig. 173. 'Sales' document header

Usually the Sales documents only list indivisible items. This means that we do not need precision of two decimal digits in the Quantity (Total) column.Hence, in the form settings we will highlight Quantity (total) field and in the Format property we will press the selection button as shown in the figure.

Fig. 174. Opening format string designer

In the format string designer window that opens check Precision and click OK. Now let us apply the form settings.

Page 153: enterprise manual 1c

153Chapter 11. Software Configuration

The Sales document will look as follows:

Fig. 175. Resulting form of the ‘Sales’ document

In this manner, in the 1C:Enterprise mode you can join related elements into groups, position them in a convenient order, hide the elements that are not required and change the display settings of the elements on a form.

11.3. SYSteM optIonS

The system options setup dialog is intended to customize debugging modes by the developer or the administrator.To open 1C:Enterprise system parameters setup dialog, use Tools – Options command of the main menu.

Fig. 176. Options setup dialog

Page 154: enterprise manual 1c

154 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

This dialog helps set up the following parameters:Form opening mode � – In separate windows or tabs. This setting goes into effect after the program is restarted. For details on modes for opening, see section Debugging allowed in the current session. � If this checkbox is selected, you can debug in the instance of 1C:Enterprise currently running.Enable debugging on startup. � If this checkbox is selected, debugging will be enabled the next time application instances are launched.Display performance indicators. � If this checkbox is selected, these indicators are displayed in a separate window at the lower left part of the screen (by default).Simulate server call delay. � This setting is used to test the configuration in slow-channel connections.Display All functions command � If this checkbox is selected, the All functions command that enables different actions is added to the menu. All configuration objects are included in the list regardless of whether they are included in the system interface or not. This setting is available if a user is authorized to use the All functions mode.

For details on how system settings impact operation, see "The 1С:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Manual".

11.4. WIndoW laYout ManageMent

Multiple auxiliary windows can be opened during operation in addition to the main window. The platform supports window layout management and navigation between windows.To open window layout management dialog, use Windows – All Windows item of the main menu. The dialog will display a list of all the currently opened windows.To switch to a required window, select it from the list and click Go to. The Windows dialog is closed automatically.To close multiple windows simultaneously, select them with your mouse while holding Shift down and click Close windows. It is impossible to close the main window using this dialog.Also to switch between windows within the same session, you can use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + Tab, Ctrl + Shift + Tab, Ctrl + Shift + F6. To switch to the next active window, press Ctrl + Tab or Ctrl + F6. To switch to the previous window, press Ctrl + Shift + Tab or Ctrl + Shift + F6. At that opened modal and locking windows are taken into account: if a window is overlapped by a locking window, this window will not be activated.In the tab mode, a list of windows includes all open tabs as well without any description of their actions. For details on the tab mode, see section "Working in the Tab Mode" on page 40.

Page 155: enterprise manual 1c

155Chapter 11. Software Configuration

11.4.1. Windows of text and Spreadsheet documents

In addition to various forms that are used for accounting purposes, 1C:Enterprise supports operations with text and spreadsheet documents (reports and spreadsheet documents created by a user). For these types of windows, menu items that provide additional services can be used when viewing and editing. The Split Window Horizontally and Split Window Vertically items can be used to view various parts of a window within one window. These menu items are only available if a text or a spreadsheet document window is active. The selected window is split into two equal parts. If you want to change the proportion, place the mouse pointer to the window separator. Depending on the type of the selected separator type, the mouse pointer is changed into double vertical or horizontal arrow. Left-click and move the mouse to change the subwindows size.Undoing splitting of the text editor. Select Windows – Remove Window Split menu item or drag the separator line to one of the text editor borders to cancel split-ting of the window.

11.4.2. restoring Window position

You can change the location, size and status of windows. When a window is closed, the latest window display options are saved, and when this window is reopened, the most recent display options are used.To restore the initial location, size, and status of the window, select Windows – Restore window position from the main menu. The stored display options are reset, and the original options are restored.

Page 156: enterprise manual 1c

156 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 157: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 12

GettInG help

The help content can be used to obtain information on 1C:Enterprise system and specific objects and modes (Help menu item or F1 key). The main menu includes the Help submenu.When you open help from a specific mode, the help section is displayed that corre-sponds to the current run mode. The Content menu item and Shift + F1 keyboard shortcut are intended to open the general help table of content.

12.1. help WIndoW

Help window consists of two parts. The upper part includes a toolbar used to navi-gate and search for information. The help contents are shown under the toolbar.If the text does not completely fit in the window, scroll bars will appear to the right and below the window that can be used to display the invisible parts.

Fig. 177. Help window

Page 158: enterprise manual 1c

158 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

In the top part of the window, under the heading, a toolbar is located containing the buttons for navigating through topics.

12.1.1. viewing help Information

To find the required topic, you can use the table of contents. In the Help window, select the Contents button.The left portion of the window will display a tree of topics.

Fig. 178. Help content

The tree of help topics is generated automatically and includes system help and configuration help. Help may contain guidelines on working with specific sections of the program.For convenient viewing, you can expand or collapse the tree or individual branches.+ (plus) icon in the branch node indicates that this branch can be expanded. To do so, it is sufficient to click the icon or double-click the name of the topic next to the icon. The next level of the branch will be opened for viewing, and the + (plus) icon will be changed into - (minus). To collapse tree branch, click the - (minus) icon.In order to expand all the tree branches at once, select the root topic name with your keyboard or mouse and press * (gray asterisk) key located on the number pad.The first level of the tree includes section names.By expanding branches of the topic tree one by one, you can go to the description of a specific data item.To navigate through the topics, you can use the topic tree or the control panel buttons in the Help window.To view the text of a specific topic, select the topic name in the tree with your mouse or arrow keys on your keyboard and press Enter. The viewing window will display the text of the selected topic.

Page 159: enterprise manual 1c

159Chapter 12. Getting Help

To navigate through the description text, you can use arrow keys or the PgDn and PgUp keys.For a large amount of text, the scroll bars to the right and below the window can be used to move to display the unseen portions of the description.The buttons in the Help window toolbar allow you to quickly move from one topic to another.

Fig. 179. Help window toolbar

The Next button is intended to open the succeeding topic. In the topic tree, the corresponding branch will be opened, and the highlighting will move along the topic titles, showing the current location in the tree. To go to the preceding topic, use the Previous button.If you need to abort loading of a help page in the process of operation, you can do so with the Abort page load command.When a topic with the description of the 1C:Enterprise script element has been found and the help window is open, use the Find current element in the tree button in the command bar to search for the topic in the tree.If you select multiple pages for viewing, you can use the Go forward and Go back commands to return to the previously viewed pages. The program saves the history of help topics viewed. To return to the previously viewed topic or to move to the next viewed topic in the history, select the move-ment history buttons.

12.1.2. Searching for help Information

There are several ways of searching for help content, as described below.Search by index. The Help window allows you to search for help content by index. In the toolbar, select the Index button. The left portion of the window will display the help topics index (see fig. 180).In the top row, there is an text box used to type the topic name. A sorted list of topics is located below. Begin typing the topic name. As you type, the topic title with the first characters matching those being typed will be highlighted.If the desired topic is found, press Enter. In the Help window, the help contents for the given topic will be displayed.

Page 160: enterprise manual 1c

160 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 180. Opening Help index

If there are multiple descriptions for this topic in the help content, a list of these descriptions will be displayed in the Select Topic window.

Fig. 181. Help content selection

Select the desired chapter and click Show.

Tip

You can also use the keyboard shortcut Alt + Shift + F1 to open help index.

Search in help. To find topics containing a specified string, select Help – Search Help. A window will be displayed allowing you to search using random description

Page 161: enterprise manual 1c

161Chapter 12. Getting Help

text. The upper part contains a field to enter the search string and a field containing the list of description topics found.To begin the search, start typing the text. While you are typing, the system searches for topics where the entered text is present. Search is not case-sensitive; only whole words of the text are matched (unless the * operator is used), with morphology taken into account. Search operators can be used (see "Format of Search Expressions" below).While you are typing, the program displays the list of corresponding topics. If the entered text is not found anywhere, the program displays appropriate message under the text box.

Fig. 182. Search in the Help system

When you open a topic, the program shows the description in such a way that the first occurrence of the specified text is visible.To view a topic, select it from the list and press Enter. The description of the selected topic will be shown in the nearby field.

Tip

You can also use the keyboard shortcut Alt + F1 to search in help.

12.1.3. format of Search expressions

You can search by several words, exact phrases, or using search operators.By default, search with synonyms or fuzzy search are not carried out. To search in these modes, you should use appropriate operators.

Page 162: enterprise manual 1c

162 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The search operators listed in the table below are allowed in the text box.

Operator Example DetailsSpace AND &

entry documententry AND document entry & document

All the topics will be found that contain both the word "entry" and the word ‘document’ with morphology taken into account

OR | ,

entry OR document entry | document entry, document

All the topics will be found that contain at least one of the words "entry" and "document" with morphology taken into account

NOT ~

closing NOT month closing ~ month

All the topics will be found that contain the word "closing" but do not contain the word "month" with morphology taken into account. ~ cannot be used in the beginning of the string

NEAR/[±]n Example 1: right NEAR/3 userExample 2: right NEAR/+3 userExample 3: right NEAR/-3 user

Searches for a topic that contains the specified words sepa-rated by n words (with morphology taken into account).The sign determines where the second word should be located with respect to the first word (+ after the first word; - before it).If no sign is specified, the search will retrieve the text that contains the words separated by n words. Their order is not important.The example 1 will result in finding the topics where the word "user" is located before or after the word "right" and is separated from it by a maximum of three words.The example 2 will result in finding the topics where the word "user" is located after the word "right" and is sepa-rated from it by a maximum of three words.The example 3 will result in finding the topics where the word "user" is located before the word "right" and is sepa-rated from it by a maximum of three words

NEARNEAR

Library NEAR named NEAR Dostoyevsky

Short form. The query will find all the topics in the short form where both words are contained; the words are separated by a maximum of 8 words and located in any position

"" "document posting" Searching for exact phrase taking into account the morphology (equivalent to: "posting NEAR/+1 document")

() (posting | statement) & (of account, document)

Word grouping (any number of nesting levels)

* docu* Searches using a wildcard (replacing the end of the word). More than one significant character must be entered. The "docu*" query will find "document" as a noun, "document" as a verb, "documentary" etc. (If the search index includes more than 300 words starting with "docu", the user will be prompted to refine the query.) While using search in help, the * character may be located in any place of the word and can be used unlimited number of times, e.g. "*OC*nt*"

If no operators are specified (words entered with spaces), the application will search for all the words from the query using the AND operator.

note 1

The AND, OR, NOT, NEAR operators must be entered in upper case only.

Page 163: enterprise manual 1c

163Chapter 12. Getting Help

NOTE 2

Operators must not be used on their own (at the beginning of the search string). For example, it is impossible to select all the topics without the specified text.

NOTE 3

All the characters in the search field except for search operators, letters, and digits are ignored. To search for special characters that are used in the text, they should be enclosed in quotation marks. Example: "ObtainNomenclatureData()".

12.1.4. printing descriptions

To print any topic description:In the description window select the topic to be printed and click anywhere in �the text for an insertion point to be displayed;Highlight the required text and copy it to the clipboard; �Paste the copied text to any text editor and print it. �

12.2. aBout 1c:enterprISe WIndoW

The About 1C:Enterprise window is opened using Help – About … item of the main menu or by clicking the i button in the system commands area.

Fig. 183. Opening 'About 1C:Enterprise' window

This window displays general information about the 1C:Enterprise system and specifications for launching the system.

Fig. 184. 'About 1C:Enterprise' window

Page 164: enterprise manual 1c

164 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The window displays the following data:Information on the current 1C:Enterprise version; �Information on the configuration you are currently working with (name and �configuration version);Information on the infobase the user is currently working with: �

Infobase name as defined in the infobase list of the 1C:Enterprise startup ○dialog; database format (format for saving information): file or client-server; ○The directory that contains the infobase and the information on infobase ○regional settings.

Application (run mode: � Thick client, Thin client, and Web client). Also displayed are connection speed and data compression mode (without compression, standard, forced).The name of the user currently working with the program. If the current user’s �full name is specified and it does not match the nickname, the current user’s name is shown in the format Nickname; Full Name.The data on infobase and session localization. �Clicking the � Technical support information hyperlink displays an error log in a new window. For more details on an error log see page 139.

You can copy the information displayed in the window to the clipboard using a context menu command.

Page 165: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 13

usInG web ClIent

This chapter covers operation of 1C:Enterprise web client. To be able to access the infobase via a web client, the infobase should be located on a special server.A web client operates in a web browser. The following browser types are supported:

Mozilla Firefox 3.x, 4.x or higher for Microsoft Windows and Linux. �Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 or 9.0 for Microsoft Windows. It is �recommended to use version 7.0. The web client may not operate efficiently under Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0.Google Chrome 4.0–8.0 for Microsoft Windows. �Safari 4.0.5 or higher for Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X. �Mobile Safari for iPad in iOS 3.2, 4.2 or higher. It is recommended to use �version 4.2 or higher.

Warning!

For web client operation under Windows XP SP 2, you will need to have jscript.dll system library version 5.6.0.8834 or later. The library is located in the system32 directory of the operating system. If you have an earlier version of the library installed on your computer, web client performance may be significantly slower. To update the version, you will need to download the update pack available at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/942840/en–us.

13.1. WeB clIent Startup

To launch the web client, enter the infobase address as follows to the web browser address bar:http://hostwhere host is an address of the site corresponding to the infobase.

Page 166: enterprise manual 1c

166 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

When the infobase is loaded, the address bar will automatically have a combination of characters added formatted /aa_BB, where aa – interface language identifier, and BB – country identifier.You can launch the web client and navigate to an external link simultaneously. When you enter an external link to the web browser address bar, the application will be loaded and the data of the link will be opened.For details on links, see "Links" on the page 125.

NOTE 1

When Internet Explorer is used, it is recommended to open external links in a new empty browser window.

Note 2

If the required parameters (defining pop-up window operation and switching between the windows) are not set, a browser mode setting dialog displays when a web client is first launched in Mozilla Firefox. Clicking the Enable button intro-duces any necessary changes into the browser settings, and the application will continue loading. Pressing the Exit button quits the application.

13.1.1. Web client Window

In the web client the command interface of the application looks similar to the thin client interface.

Fig. 185. Main window of the web client

Page 167: enterprise manual 1c

167Chapter 13. Using Web Client

When you navigate to various areas of the application (sections, lists, etc), the history of such movements is stored in the main window of the web client.To exit the application and go to an empty page, select File – Exit in the main menu of the main window.

13.1.2. Specific features of printing

The web client print form includes a How to configure print options hyperlink near the Print button that displays the respective help topic. This topic describes setup of print in the web browser where the print process is initiated.

13.1.3. operations with files

There are some specific features of working with files in the web client that are related to specifics of security models of the web browser.The dialog windows that are displayed when you load or save files are different for every web browser. All the operations with the file system (downloading a file from the server, uploading a file to the server, deleting a file, etc.) are executed interactively only. Depending on the configuration, the application interface may include a command that enables advanced files operations extension.For details of configuring the advanced files operations extension for Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox web browsers see page 173 and page 174.

NOTE

It is impossible to drag files to the web client window.

13.2. SpecIfIc featureS of the WeB clIent

There are some specific features of web client operation that are described below.

13.2.1. Saving documents

For web browser security reasons, all the operations with the file system require specific confirmation from the user. If advanced files operations extension is installed, when files are saved to a disk, the web client will display the warning Get file <Path> from server?If advanced files operations extension is not installed, standard browser dialog will be used to save files.

Page 168: enterprise manual 1c

168 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

13.2.2. operations with tabs

If you use Internet Explorer 7 or Internet Explorer 8 as your browser and have tabs opened, Ctrl + Tab keyboard shortcut switches between browser tabs instead of switching between application windows. If tabs are disabled, switching can be executed without limitations using all the keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl + Tab, Ctrl + F6).In Mozilla Firefox you cannot activate a window using a keyboard shortcut by default. Additional customization is required to use this feature. For details on web browser setup, see "Mozilla Firefox Configuration" on the page 174.

13.2.3. operations with Windows

In Microsoft Internet Explorer a modal window blocks all the parent windows �while in Mozilla Firefox only the parent window of this specific window is blocked. At that the remaining windows of the application are dimmed and while you can switch to these windows, you cannot execute any actions in them. When a modal window is opened, Microsoft Internet Explorer stops refreshing �the display of the main window. Behavior of the remaining window is similar to that in Mozilla Firefox.When a user tries to close a window which is blocked by another window in �the web client, a standard browser alert containing the following message is displayed: This window may only be closed after all windows opened from it are closed! Choose Cancel to quit closing of the window.The web client window cannot be sized under a specific size defined by the web �browser used.In some situations where other clients open a menu or selection list to select a �value, the web client will open a new window.Details menus of reports that are generated using data composition system, are �displayed as a new web browser window.

When a user is working with several monitors, web client windows behavior can be described as follows:

The main window behavior depends on the browser window behavior (when �the user is working with several monitors).Any auxiliary, blocking or modal windows open in the same monitor as the last �active window.

13.2.4. other Specific features

13.2.4.1. Selecting Slow Connection ModeTo choose the slow connection mode, select Tools – Options in the main menu. In the options dialog check Set slow connection mode on startup. The slow connec-tion mode will be enabled when the web client is launched next.

Page 169: enterprise manual 1c

169Chapter 13. Using Web Client

NOTE

When you launch an infobase from the web browser address bar, О=Low option can be used to select slow connection mode.

13.2.4.2. Operations with FilesFile – New � of the main menu only allows to create text documents.File comparison mode is not supported. �The list of last opened files is not supported. �Dragging files to web client forms is not supported. �

13.2.4.3. Graphical SchemaThe web client supports opening, saving and printing of graphical schemas. Graphical schemas cannot be edited.

13.2.4.4. Operations with Spreadsheet DocumentsEditing of spreadsheet documents in the web client is not supported. At that you can dock a table and displays groups using respective commands of the Table menu.If a non-empty cell of a spreadsheet document has Auto selected for text location, the cell is merged either to the next filled cell or to the end of the spreadsheet docu-ment horizontally.Also when you work with a spreadsheet document, the following specific features exist:

Interactive commands that customize display of the spreadsheet document are �not supported.In a cell of a spreadsheet document the text will always be displayed horizon- �tally.Background pictures are not displayed in a spreadsheet document. �Patterns are not displayed for spreadsheet document cells. �Scrolling by pressing a mouse scroll wheel is not supported in spreadsheet �documents or tables of forms.In a spreadsheet document if empty cells exist after a populated cell (to the �next populated cell or to the end of spreadsheet document row), the cells are displayed as merged.In Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and 7 if merged cells have a left border �defined but bottom border is not, the border will not be displayed to the bottom border of the merged cell.

Page 170: enterprise manual 1c

170 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Printing a Spreadsheet DocumentBy default, a spreadsheet document is printed in PDF format by the web client. To print the document in HTML, select the HTML radio button in the Print method group of the system settings (Tools – Options of the main menu).

Fig. 186. Print method

13.2.4.5. Picture FieldThe picture preview window in the web client there are no commands for scale. The Stretch proportionally command of the Size submenu allows you to stretch the picture proportionally the borders of the window.

13.2.4.6. Status WindowIn Mozilla Firefox status is refreshed upon every server query and upon comple- �tion of the 1C:Enterprise script command execution.

13.2.4.7. NotificationsIn a web client notifications are displayed within current window.If a notification is displayed in an auxiliary window and this auxiliary window is closed, the notification will be displayed in the main window.

13.2.4.8. Window ActivationIn Internet Explorer 8 in certain situation when you switch to an already opened window the dialog will be displayed: Click OK to navigate to the window. You will be switched to the window after you click OK in this dialog.

Page 171: enterprise manual 1c

171Chapter 13. Using Web Client

13.2.4.9. Other Specific FeaturesApplication cannot be aborted with � Ctrl+Break where such abortion is possible in other clients.You cannot customize display of chart, dendrogram, graphical and geographical �schemas.Customization is limited for Gantt chart. �A text that does not fit a table cell is not accompanied by ellipsis points on the �right.Only a limited set of fonts available in the operating systems used is supported �in the web client. Other fonts cannot be selected in the font selection dialog in the web client. When they are used, they are replaced with supported fonts.Main menu is accessed using � F10, while accessing it by clicking Alt once is not supported.In a web browser it is impossible to select a scale for display other than 100 % �or to use an irregular dpi.When lengthy operations are executed, cursor is not changed in the situations �when such changes occur in other clients.In Mozilla Firefox the presentation of navigation panel and action panel that �does not fit the panel size is not accompanied by ellipsis points to the right.In Microsoft Internet Explorer the presentation of action panel that does not fit �the panel size is not accompanied by ellipsis points to the right.When a calendar is opened from a text box, the calendar resizing mode is �not disabled if the mouse button is released outside of the window where the calendar was opened. To disable the resizing mode, click and release the left mouse button again in the window that contains the calendar.In Mozilla Firefox and in some situations with Microsoft Internet Explorer, the �color of scroll bars of an HTML document field will correspond to the color specified in the operating system. Commands of action undo and redo behave in a manner that differs from other �clients in multiline text boxs. In web client the volume of undo changes is defined by the web browser used.When you press � Shift + Del in multiline text box, the entire line is deleted while automatic splitting of line by the text box border is ignored. If a tooltip text includes line splitters, Mozilla Firefox display spaces instead of �them.In some situations when Internet Explorer 6.0 is used and a file is downloaded �from server, an empty window may remain displayed on the screen.When one is working with multistring text boxs and a text document field, the �following commands are available in the Edit menu: Find, which is for searching values,and Replace, which is for replacing values in the field.

Page 172: enterprise manual 1c

172 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Google Chrome and Safari do not support external components, file system �extensions or extensions for cryptoprotection.Google Chrome and Safari do not support the � Insert command in the shortcut menu. This shortcut menu option is not available.Link navigation dialogs in Google Chrome and Safari do not contain the � Insert from clipboard button. When opening a link navigation dialog, the clipboard value is not inserted into a link text box.Google Chrome and Safari do not support automatic user authentication with �OS tools.Google Chrome and Safari do not allow one to edit headers/footers when �printing documents.In Safari, the web client interface language matches the web browser interface �language (unless it is overridden by the launch settings).In Safari, the size of the calendar and calculator windows may not be less than �the minimum window size allowed for that browser.There is no print/preview settings dialog in Google Chrome. �When one is navigating between the windows with the hotkeys or trying to �open an already opened document – including in other similar cases in Google Chrome 7 and below – the following message is displayed after switching to a new window: "Window is navigated. Click OK to continue".The Chrome browser under Windows does not support switching between web �client windows by clicking Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Shift+Tab.The Safari browser (Windows) does not allow one to set the preferred language. �Therefore unless the language is explicitly specified in the web client launch string, OS interface language will be used.When one is opening a new window by pressing the Ctrl key in Safari �(Windows), the window is opened in a new tab (not in a separate window) by default. It is recommended to change this behavior by selecting Settings – Preferences… – Tabs and unchecking Ctrl-click opens a link in a new tab.The � Next/Previous commands in HTML document fields in Google Chrome and Safari do not navigate the content set as a string (only the content set with URLs).

13.2.5. Working on ipad

The � Formatted document control functions only in the Read Only mode.Dragging is not supported. �Navigation to the main window with auxiliary windows opened is not �supported.Printing is not supported. �No context menu is displayed for text boxs. �Use the button for closing in the upper right corner of the main window to quit �the web client.

Page 173: enterprise manual 1c

173Chapter 13. Using Web Client

A quick double-click in the same screen area is used instead of the left double- �click. A long click (over 1 second) is used instead of the right-click. Working with windows in the tabs is not supported. �

The following dimensions are increased to improve convenience: ○String height in a table □String height in a drop-down list of an text box □Button width in an text box □Calendar □

No scrollbars are provided for the following controls (move your finger over ○the element area to scroll):

Table □Spreadsheet document □Drop-down list of an text box □HTML document □Navigation panel □Messages panel □Help window □

13.3. MIcroSoft Internet explorer Setup

In order to use a web browser, you need to set up the configuration. To do so, select Internet Options from the Tools menu and edit settings as follows:

Enable JavaScript scripts: �On the ○ Security tab select Custom level for the zone where the web site is located;In the ○ Scripting section for Active scripting select Enable.

Enable pop-up windows: �On the ○ Privacy tab in the Pop-up Blocker section uncheck Block Pop-ups.

Enable cookies: �On the ○ Privacy tab choose the level of cookies use not higher than Medium High with the controller available.

To work with external components the web browser should be configured as follows:

On the � Security tab click the Custom level button;In the window that opens check � Enable for the following options:

Automatic prompting for ActiveX controls ○Download signed ActiveX controls ○Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins ○Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting ○

Page 174: enterprise manual 1c

174 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Every time an auxiliary window is opened, keyboard layout is selected according to the operating system settings. If the layout does not match the data entry language, you will need to specify the required entry language in settings to avoid language switch.The following actions will let you set a default entry language:

O � pen Regional and Languages Options settings of the operating system;On the � Languages tab in the Text services and input languages section click Details...;In the window that opens on the � Settings tab in the Default input language section select the language you need;Click � OK.

13.3.1. file System extension Setup

Implementation for Internet Explorer requires that a special ActiveX component to be installed – 1C:Enterprise 8.2. Extension for operations with files for Internet Explorer (x86) or its 64-bit version for 64-bit Internet Explorer. The component is included in the platform, but the application must be able to support its installation. If the user is not authorized to install the component, this can be done instead by the administrator.In order to be able to work with the component, the browser should have the rights granted for installation and use of signed ActiveX controls for the zone where the web site is located.Note

To ensure correct operation of the file system extension, use Microsoft Core XML Services (MSXML) 4.0 or 6.0 library.

For a list of MSXML module versions, installation limitations and recommenda-tions see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/269238.

13.4. MozIlla fIrefox Setup

To be able to use Mozilla Firefox web browser, the following settings should be applied:1. From the Tools menu select Options.

On the ○ Content tab apply the following settings:Uncheck □ Block pop-up windows;Check □ Enable JavaScript.

On the ○ Privacy tab apply the following settings:Check □ Accept cookies from sites.For detailed settings of accepting or blocking cookies click the □ Exceptions button and follow the instructions in the dialog that opens.

Click ○ OK.

Page 175: enterprise manual 1c

175Chapter 13. Using Web Client

2. Launch 1C:Enterprise web client by entering the infobase address to your web browser address bar. In the main menu of the web client select Tools – Web Browser Setup. This will display the Web Browser Setup dialog.

To work with the operating system clipboard, advanced files operations ○extension and external components, check Enable operations with clipboard, advanced files operations extension, external components. To be able to use non-Latin characters in the web browser address bar (for ○example, to navigate 1C:Enterprise links), check Enable non-Latin characters in command line options. To enable activations of windows with keyboard shortcuts, check ○ Enable keyboard to switch between application windows. Operating system authentication is set by checking the ○ Use operating system authentication checkbox. In some cases, additional modification of browser settings may be required: specify a list of websites supporting operating system authentication in the network.negotiate-auth.trusted-uris and network.negotiate-auth.delegation-uris parameters. To set these parameters, enter about:config in the browser address bar, and then enter the parameter names and specify a list of websites as parameters in the filter list.

Note

For additional information on operating system authentication setup in Mozilla Firefox, see https://developer.mozilla.org/en/Integrated_Authentication.

To apply the selected settings, click OK in the Web Browser Setup dialog.

13.4.1. file System extension Setup

If a web browser setup dialog is opened with the Set file system extension command of the Tools menu, the program prompts you to select the Allow working with a clipboard, file system extension, and external components checkbox before the setup dialog is opened.

13.4.2. language Settings

If the platform interface language differs from the web browser interface language, for correct operation of the web client the configuration is required as follows (loca-tion of settings is quoted for version 3.5):1. In the main menu select Tools – Options.2. In the window that opens on the Contents tab in the Fonts & Colors group click

Advanced.3. For the Default Character Encoding option select Unicode.

Page 176: enterprise manual 1c

176 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

NOTE

When Mozilla Firefox stores user decision on granting privileges and you want to modify the decision, you will need to edit prefs.js located in the user profile folder of Mozilla Firefox.For information on locating the profile folder, see: http://support.mozilla.com/en-US/kb/Profiles Next you will need to perform the procedure as follows:1. Close Mozilla Firefox.2. Open prefs.js file using any word processor.3. Locate the string UniversalXPConnect in the code. The following code frag-

ment will be retrieved:user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.granted", "UniversalXPConnect");

user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.id", "<URL>");

user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p.<XX>subjectName", "").

Or:user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.denied", "UniversalXPConnect");user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.id", "<URL>");user_pref("capability.principal.codebase.p<XX>.subjectName", "").

Where <XX> is a random number while <URL> is the address of the required website. If <URL> is different, continue searching for the "UniversalXPCon-nect" string further on in the code.

4. Delete the found strings from the code.

13.5. google chroMe Setup

Before using this web browser, set the following Internet Options. Open the Tools menu, select Options, press the Content settings button on the Under the Hood tab and then set the required parameters.

Enable cookies: at the � Cookies tab, select the Allow local data to be set (recommended) checkbox or set exceptions. Enable Java scripts execution: on the � JavaScript tab, select the Allow all sites to run JavaScript (recommended) checkbox or set exceptions. Enable pop-up windows: on the � Pop-ups tab, select the Allow all sites to show pop-ups checkbox or set the exceptions.

It is recommended to set file saving parameters. To do so:Open the � Tools menu, select Options. Select the � Ask where to save each file before download checkbox in the Downloads section of the Under the Hood tab.

Page 177: enterprise manual 1c

177Chapter 13. Using Web Client

13.6. SafarI Setup

Before using this web browser, set the following browser options. Open the Safari Settings menu, select Preferences and then set the required param-eters:

Enable Java scripts execution: on the � Security tab select the Enable JavaScript checkbox; Enable cookies: on the � Security tab in the Accept cookies group select the Only from sites I visit checkbox; Enable pop-up windows: on the � Security tab clear the Block pop-up windows checkbox.

It is recommended to set file saving parameters. To do so:In the � Safari Settings menu select Preferences; On the � General tab select the Always prompt before downloading checkbox.

Note

Safari for Mac OS does not prompt the user to specify the location to save the file.

Page 178: enterprise manual 1c

178 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 179: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 14

slow ConneCtIon Mode

The slow connection mode is intended to use the application using a slow commu-nication path (e.g., using a GPRS modem). The operation speed and traffic volume are optimized by increasing the number of server queries and abandoning transfer of insignificant information.The connection speed is defined in the infobase adding and editing dialogs (for details, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Administrator Guide"), in the infobase options when client is launched (for details, see "Connection Speed Selection" on the page 25.Selection of slow connection mode is visible in the interface by absence of icons of sections on the sections panel.When you begin working, the commands of the desktop are displayed along with an empty work area that contains the hyperlink Show desktop. If you need to work with desktop forms, you should open the desktop using this link. When working with data in the slow connection mode, you should bear in mind that a server notification of closing a form that locks some data is sent 20 seconds later or simultaneously with a query to open another form.In this mode when you select data for an text box from a list or when you use string input, instead of reading data from the database each time the previously received data will be used where possible. If new data appear in a database and you need to select them while they are not displayed in the list yet, you should repeat selection for the text box (by clicking the selection button again without moving to another field) or update the list (using the Update command or pressing F5 in the selection list form). Also when you type from the keyboard in an text box, the selection list is not opened automatically. To open the list, press the Down Arrow button.

Page 180: enterprise manual 1c

180 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 181: enterprise manual 1c

Chapter 15

ordInary applICatIon Mode

This chapter covers operations with the configurations designed specifically for the ordinary application mode or created on the platform version 8.1.

15.1. Interface

In the ordinary application mode the main window of the application significantly differs from that visible in the managed application mode. In general, it may look as shown below:

Fig. 187. Main window of the ordinary application

Page 182: enterprise manual 1c

182 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The main menu includes commands for operations with files, editing, opening forms of configuration objects, etc.The toolbars include commands to open standard and service features. To navigate to lists and infobase objects, use the Operations menu and toolbar buttons provided that it is defined during configuration development.

15.2. operatIonS Menu

The Operations menu is used to navigate to lists and infobase objects as well as to open service features. When you select a type of object in the Operations menu, the list of existing objects of this type will be displayed. Select the name of the required object from the list and click OK. The form of the selected object will be opened in a new window.

15.2.1. list customization

15.2.1.1. Filtering and Sorting a ListTo customize a list that is displayed in a table (lists of objects, journals and docu-ment lists, etc), use the Filter and Sort dialog that is opened when you select Set Filter Parameters.

Setting a Filter Some lists allow data to be filtered by attribute values. This lets you view only the data that have a certain value in the filtered attribute. For example, you can display all the contractors that are defined as individuals. You can filter data by a specified set of attributes. A data filter is defined by filter type, comparison type and filter value.Filter types means the criteria defined during configuration development. When filtering, a user can apply only those filter types that were defined during configura-tion development. For example, the Contractor type can serve as a filter type.The comparison type indicates how filter will be applied. The assortment of avail-able comparison types is determined by the data type. It is possible to filter data containing dates after a given date, in an interval of dates belonging to the list or, vice versa, not belonging to the list, etc.A filter value can be any of the available values of the attribute, for example, Individual. The filter type and value together are the filter criterion. A filter condi-tion must be unique at any given moment.Note that most lists support filtering by one or multiple attributes. If a list does not support filters, the menus and toolbars will not contain interface controls to manage filters.

Page 183: enterprise manual 1c

183Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

When a filter is set, the list form window will display only the elements that satisfy the selected filter conditions. Filters can be set for list data in multiple ways.Manual filter setting. You can set the filter criterion yourself, meaning that you select both the filter type and its value.To set the filter manually, select Set Filter Parameters.This menu item and button may be unavailable if the user is not granted the right to set a filter themselves.When you enter the filter setup mode, a dialog opens where you should select the filter type and its specific value. The list of filter elements is determined when the task is configured for every list type. You can specify or change it using software tools prior to opening the form.For example, the list setup for a document journal can be as follows:

Fig. 188. Setup of document journal list

To define a filter criterion, select the attributes, specify their values and comparison type. For example, suppose the attribute is Warehouse Documents, the value is Main Warehouse, and the condition is Not equal.There is a field intended to enter the filter value to the right of the list of filter types in the dialog. The input format depends on the value type. For example, you should enter a numeric value to filter by a numerical attribute or select a company from the corresponding list to filter by a company. After you have entered the filter value, click OK. For some filter types it is impossible to enter the value directly because they include values of various types.If you set the filter for hierarchical data, the contents of the list depend on the view mode. If the hierarchical view is set, the filter criteria are not applied to folders, i.e. all the catalog folders are displayed. If a non-hierarchical view is set, only those items are displayed that meet the filter criteria.

Page 184: enterprise manual 1c

184 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

For hierarchical data, you can set a hierarchy comparison type. If you select the In hierarchy comparison type, the system checks whether the value belongs to the folder. If you select the Not in hierarchy comparison type, the system checks whether the value does not belong to the folder.When you change a list filter for all the registers subordinate to the recorder, the order can be replaced with the one that is optimal for the filter if such filter was defined by the system when the list was initially opened. For example, if a filter by the recorder is applied, the order by row number is set while if filter by recorder is cancelled, the order by date is applied instead.

Filter by Current Value

When you analyze the data entered into a table box, you might want to filter it by specific value of the current cell. You can do so using the Filter and Sort dialog. To simplify the process, you can also use the dedicated command, Filter By Current Value, or the corresponding button of the command bar. The command is available if it is possible to filter this column of the table. For such columns you will see the Filter By Current Value button available in the command bar.To filter by a value, select the cell containing this value and then click Filter By Current Value. The command initiates filtering, and the button is displayed as pressed.Filtering by a value is equivalent to filtering by this column while specifying a single value and the Equal to filter criterion.To cancel filtering by value, select the cell containing this value and click Filter By Current Value again. You can filter by value sequentially (first one column is filtered by the value, then another one and so on).If a filter other than filter by value is applied to a column, the Filter By Current Value button is not displayed as pressed, and filtering by value will change the criteria of the previous filter.

Filter Clearing

To disable a filter, select the Clear filter menu item. In this case, all the list records will be displayed.

Defining Presentation OrderYou can specify an order for the selected objects to be displayed on the Sort tab.

Page 185: enterprise manual 1c

185Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

Fig. 189. Customizing a list sorting

There are two lists on the tab. In the left list, you define a set of attributes to define the order of data display, the attribute action sequence (priority) and sort direction for every attribute. You select attributes from the list on the right. You compose the list and specify the sequence of applying attributes and direction for sorting using the buttons. If multiple attributes are specified, at first the data is sorted by the first attribute according to the selected sort direction, then the data sharing the value of this attribute is sorted by the second attribute according to the selected sort direction, and so on. If you want the customized sorting to be applied when this form is opened, check Use these sort settings on open.

15.2.1.2. List CustomizationYou can manage data update and customize the order of columns in the list, their visibility and the behavior of the list upon opening in the List Options dialog. This dialog is opened using Actions – List Options command.

Fig. 190. Dialog of customizing columns display in a list

Page 186: enterprise manual 1c

186 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

You can customize the display of columns on the Columns tab. Set the order of columns in the list using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. Use the Apply button to view the results of the selected settings.To restore the default settings, click the Standard Order button.

Important!

If customization or repositioning (by dragging or in a dialog) is disabled for a column during configuration development or using scrip tools, such columns can-not be customized. It is also impossible to insert columns between two columns that are not allowed to be repositioned.

On the Other tab you can set up restoration of the list position when it is opened, select a position in the list for when it is opened and customize automatic list update.

Fig. 191. Customization of additional list parameters

If Restore position on open is checked, the row that was active when the list was previously closed, will be active when the list is reopened.If you select Start or End as the value for On open go to, the first or the last row becomes active when list is opened depending on the specified condition.The data displayed in a list can change not only when they are interactively entered by the user, but also when other objects are created and during operation in multi-user mode. It is often necessary that the list data remains valid without additional user activity. If you check Update automatically every, the system updates the list periodically after the interval specified in the text box to the right of the check box. The main purpose of this setup mode is to ensure automatic refreshment of the list data at

Page 187: enterprise manual 1c

187Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

a specified frequency. We recommend using this mode only for individual list forms processed concurrently by multiple users, when immediate viewing of their work results is required. Such situations are, however, quite rare in practice. Therefore the auto update setting is usually not needed.If Do not filter new strings is unchecked, when a new row is entered that does not meet the requirements of the currently applied filter, the appropriate message will be displayed.The Set Hierarchical View on open check box is only available for customization of hierarchical lists. This check box is intended to manage hierarchical view in a form. The status of the check box corresponds to the state of the Hierarchical View button of the command bar.

15.2.2. reports

15.2.2.1. Report Settings WizardThe report settings wizard provides multiple relatively simply options for report customization for the user to select from. This wizard is convenient when you need to customize a report without going into all the details because the wizard makes it possible to only select the major settings for every type of report items.When you launch this wizard, all the previous manual settings may be lost, so a message is displayed reading: Manual settings will be lost. Do you want to continue? If you click Yes, the data composition settings wizard is launched.

Fig. 192. Data Composition Settings Wizard

Page 188: enterprise manual 1c

188 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Select the required type of data arrangement and click Next. If you do not need to customize the remaining parameters, click OK.

Fig. 193. Selecting fields in a report

In the field selection window that opens, select the fields that you want to be displayed in the report. You can use buttons or dragging. You can sort the selected fields using arrows. To proceed to the next window of settings, click Next. For Table type of report, you can set groupings in rows, columns or tables. For Chart type of report, groupings can be in series, points and tables.In the window that opens select the fields and type of groupings they can serve as:

No hierarchy � – only data of items; Hierarchy � – data both from folders and items; Hierarchy only � – data display by folders.

When you click Next>, the wizard prompts you to select the field to order by.

Fig. 194. Selecting a field to order by

Page 189: enterprise manual 1c

189Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

You select them in the same way as grouping fields. For every field, you have to define a sort direction.For List and Table types of reports, customization of parameters by the settings wizard finishes here. For Chart type of report, after you have clicked Next>, you will need to select the chart type.

Fig. 195. Selecting a chart in the report settings wizard

After you close the data composition settings wizard, the saved settings become available for further editing in the report setup window.

15.2.3. report Setup

A report includes customizable settings. In this situation the term "Settings" includes:

report structure �assortment of fields included in a report �assortment of fields included in groupings �filters �sorting �conditional appearances �other settings �

Settings can be modified in a new window that is opened when you click Settings in a report (if the button is provided for during configuration development).

Page 190: enterprise manual 1c

190 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 196. Report settings setup form for 'Report on Nomenclature'

A form that is used to edit settings includes a table box of the report structure, a command bar to select the customized item and a set of settings arranged in tabs. You can either customize the entire report or its individual items, including nested items. You can switch between various setup modes using the Report and <Structure item> buttons (the label of the second button depends on the selected structure item). The buttons on the command bar of the report setup form provide for saving to file or restoring it from an XML document or for opening the report settings wizard.Management of report settings is in general similar to management of report variant settings.

15.3. ServIce featureS

15.3.1. options Setup

Various parameters for 1C:Enterprise operation are set using the Tools – Options menu item. Options are used to customize operation of various program modes for a specific user. This means that when multiple users work with a single infobase, the values of options are set independently for each user. Most options are saved at the end of a session and are automatically restored when the system is restarted.All customizable options are united in several groups; you can switch between them by clicking various tabs of the Options dialog.

Page 191: enterprise manual 1c

191Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

After you edit values of options click OK for them to be applied. The new values of options will be applied and the options window will be closed.The Apply button can also be clicked to set new values for options; if this button is clicked, the options window remains open.Click the Cancel button to exit the options window without applying the changes.

15.3.1.1. General OptionsSetting Working Date. The working date is used when a date is to be set and an explicit date is not given. For example, the working date is automatically set as the date of a new document when it is first created. If Use local computer date is checked, the date applied is the computer system date. If it is unchecked, a new working date can be set.

15.3.1.2. Text Editor SetupThe controls of the Texts tab can be used to manage the 1C:Enterprise built-in text editor.Drag and drop text. You can use the drag and drop mode to copy and move text blocks.Allow cursor beyond end of line. If this option is checked, the cursor can be positioned after the ends of lines of text. Otherwise, the cursor position is limited to the Line Break symbol.Show spaces and tabs. If checked, space and tab symbols will be displayed in the text. This option is used to verify the text formatting. With Show spaces and tabs checked, the Space and Tab properties become available for you to select display of characters representing spaces and tabs.Space. Specifies the symbol used to display spaces.Tab. Specifies the symbol used to display tabs.Replace tabs with spaces when typing. If checked, when text is being entered, the tab character will be replaced by the number of spaces defined in the Tab width property.Tab width. Defines the number of characters that corresponds to a tab character during text input.Autoindent. Enables or disables auto indent when Word wrap is entered (when you press Enter).Font. Specifies the font to be used for entered text. We recommend using a fixed-width font for module code (for example, Courier).

Page 192: enterprise manual 1c

192 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

15.3.1.3. Help Display SetupThe radio button used for setup of help display is located on the Help tab. If Display in one window is checked, help information is displayed in one window.If Display in different windows is checked, help information is displayed in multiple windows.

15.3.1.4. System Settings The System tab contains debug mode connection controls. Use radio buttons only if you debug configuration performance.If Enable debugging in the current session radio button is checked, the debug mode is applied and this debug item is included into the list of available items (the Designer mode). Note that you cannot uncheck this option after applying the settings.If you want to enable debugging only for the next launch, check Set the Enable Debugging Mode on Startup.

15.3.2. toolbars

A toolbar is a panel with a set of buttons. Clicking any of the buttons with your mouse immediately executes the associated command. Each button usually has an icon that represents the command assigned to this button.In ordinary application 1C:Enterprise has two types of toolbars: docked and floating.Docked toolbars usually contain buttons for operations with information in a specific window. Their position is fixed (usually under the window header), and they cannot be modified by the user. Floating toolbars usually contain buttons for general-purpose commands that are not windows-specific. The number of toolbars that are placed in the main 1C:Enterprise window simultaneously can vary depending on the program run mode. You can also create your own toolbars from predefined set of buttons.Floating toolbars can be placed in any convenient location: attached to any side of the application window or "pinned" anywhere on the screen. When a toolbar is moved, its future location is marked with an inverted rectangle.

15.3.3. toolbar types

In the ordinary application mode 1C:Enterprise can include the following types of floating toolbars:

system toolbars �toolbars created during configuration development �toolbars created by users �

Page 193: enterprise manual 1c

193Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

System toolbars. These toolbars are built into the program and cannot be deleted by either the 1C:Enterprise or the Designer tools. You can add or delete buttons on these toolbars, but the software will "remember" their configuration and can restore it upon request.Toolbars created in the process of configuration setup. These toolbars are created during configuration development and contain commands for operations with specific data items: documents, journals, reports etc. They can be changed and restored like system toolbars. These toolbars can only be deleted when working in the Designer mode.User toolbars. Users can create their own toolbars when working in 1C:Enterprise. Such toolbars are created from built-in sets of buttons. You can create any number of these toolbars.

15.3.4. toolbar Management

To manage toolbars, use Tools – Settings item of the main application menu.The Settings dialog contains two tabs.

15.3.4.1. Toolbars TabThe controls on this tab are used to create, edit and delete toolbars.

Fig. 197. Toolbars setup dialog

Toolbars that are currently displayed on the screen are checked in the toolbar list. You can display and hide toolbars by checking and unchecking them in the list.When this dialog is opened for the first time, a toolbar list will contain only the system toolbars and those created during configuration development. When a user creates new toolbars, their names are added to the list.

Page 194: enterprise manual 1c

194 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

15.3.4.2. Creating ToolbarsTo create a toolbar, go to the Toolbars tab and click Create… Enter a new toolbar name when prompted. When you click OK, a new toolbar is created, initially without any buttons.

15.3.4.3. Renaming a ToolbarYou can rename only custom toolbars.

To rename a toolbar, select it, click � Rename and enter a new name. When you select a name of another toolbar from the list or close the dialog using the Close button, the new name will be assigned to the toolbar.

15.3.4.4. Deleting a ToolbarYou can only delete custom toolbars.To delete a toolbar, select it from the list and click Delete. The toolbar will be deleted without any additional warning.

15.3.5. temporary lock

Temporary lock mode is intended to prevent unauthorized use of the 1C:Enterprise system when the user is absent.Often, a specific configuration relies on the log in name of a user to identify docu-ment authorship. Frequently, a user is responsible for his or her actions. Therefore it is important to prevent users from doing any actions under the name of other users during the session. In this case, a temporary lock can be used.Temporary lock mode only makes sense when the user has been assigned a pass-word.To enter temporary lock mode, select Tools – Temporary lock menu item. The 1C:Enterprise application window is collapsed. To resume work, you should click the application shortcut. A password entry dialog box will appear.

Fig. 198. Password entry dialog during temporary lock

The password should fully match the one entered when the system was initially launched. When a correct password is entered, the system becomes available for work.

Page 195: enterprise manual 1c

195Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

15.4. SettIng uSer optIonS

In the 1C:Enterprise mode, you can change the password and select interface language. To do so, select Tools – User Options menu item.

Fig. 199. User options setup

Enter the password into the field labeled Password. A password is an arbitrary combination of alphanumeric characters. A password should not contain spaces or special characters. The maximum password length is 255 characters.When you enter a password, it is displayed in asterisks; therefore you should pay attention to what you are typing.Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field to avoid possible erratic entry. If the password confirmation does not match the originally entered password, clicking OK will display a warning: Password and password confirmation do not match and the password will not be set.Click the Cancel button if you decide not to set a password.

Warning!

You cannot view the user password. Therefore, you should pay extreme attention to selecting a password.

15.5. SavIng event log

In the ordinary application mode you can save event log data to a file in compliance with a special format.To save the event log, open it and select File – Save Copy menu item. A dialog box will be displayed to browse to the directory and the file that will be used to dump the records as well as to select the file type (the event log file extension *.elf is assigned by default). You can also dump the log in XML format.

15.6. WIndoW laYout ManageMent

15.6.1. Window panel

The Window Panel is displayed in the bottom of the application work area.

Page 196: enterprise manual 1c

196 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The window panel includes shortcuts of the opened windows that are displayed in normal layout mode (see "Window State (Layout Mode)" on the page 198). Click a window shortcut to activate the required window.The window panel can be hidden. To do so, open the context menu on the window panel, main menu, toolbar or status bar and uncheck Window Panel. Check this check box for the panel to be displayed. If you do not want the window panel to always occupy part of the application’s work area, you can enable Autohide mode. In this mode, the window panel is hidden. To show it, hover your mouse over the panel’s location for it to be displayed.

15.6.1.1. Window Setup DialogThis dialog is used to work with the list of open windows. It can be used to switch to a selected open window, to save changes, to manage the arrangement of windows, or to close one, several or all the open windows.To open the dialog, select Windows – Windows… menu item. This dialog displays the list of currently open windows. Only the windows with Ordinary status are included in the list. If the contents of an open window are modified, this window will be marked with an asterisk (*) symbol in the list, to the left of the window name.All the actions are applied to one or multiple windows specified in the list. You can select or deselect multiple rows in the standard manner. Actions that can be performed with one open window or a group of windows are described in the following table.

Button Action Number of selected windows (condition)

Activate Makes the selected window active One

SaveSaves the changes for some types of documents (e.g., text and spreadsheet document) that support this action

Any

Close windows Closes all the selected windows Any

Place

Manages window arrangement on the screen.Horizontally – arranges the selected windows from left to right.Vertically – arranges the selected windows from top to bottom.Cascade – arranges the selected windows in a cascade

More than one

Join Attaches two windows Attachment permittedDetach Detaches attached windowsOK Closes the Windows dialog Any

Page 197: enterprise manual 1c

197Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

15.6.2. Service Windows

When working in the 1C:Enterprise, the service windows are used to provide collateral information to the user. These windows include:

Immediate window �Message window �

This paragraph deals with general methods of working with service windows, as well as specific features of the listed windows.

15.6.2.1. Immediate WindowSometimes when working with the 1C:Enterprise a value of a parameter needs to be monitored. To do so, use an immediate window – a special window that reflects the calculation results of the formulas entered into the window. An immediate window can be opened using the Tools – Immediate window menu item.As a rule, the immediate window is used by the system administrator, that is, by the user who knows the 1C:Enterprise script and understands what functions can be used when performing calculations in the immediate window. The immediate window is a table box where you can enter a formula into every row and get the result by pressing Enter.Formulas may include arithmetical expressions, expressions using 1C:Enterprise script functions and procedures, and application module and shared module func-tions and procedures.Enter each expression on a separate row in the first column of the table. The calcu-lation result is displayed in the second column to the right of the expression. If an invalid formula is entered, the following error message will be displayed: Error in expression! Data in the immediate window can be arranged on tabs. You may define if a tab should be displayed by checking or unchecking the Tabs item in the context menu. You may copy calculation results to the clipboard (Copy Result item in the context menu of the second column). If the source data for the expressions changes during processing, you should refresh calculations to obtain valid results. To do so, use Recalculate or Refresh All items of the context menu of the immediate window.To clear the contents of a row in the immediate window, highlight it and press Del.

15.6.2.2. Message WindowIn addition to prompts and dialogs, 1C:Enterprise features a special message window to provide you with various information. This window is automatically opened when required.

Page 198: enterprise manual 1c

198 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

An icon describing the importance of a message is displayed near every message in the left portion of the window.A message window can be closed at any time. Note that the information displayed in the window will be lost.

15.7. WIndoW State (laYout Mode)

Windows can be laid out on the screen in various modes, including:normal layout where a window is displayed only inside the work area of the �application;floating layout, where a window can freely move around the screen (not only �within the work area of the application);docked layout, where a window is "pinned" to the borders of the work area of �the application;hidden: you can hide a window if you are not working with it at the moment. �

A state for windows of text and spreadsheet documents, and HTML-documents can be selected. It is also available for the windows with a special state defined in the configuration.Context menu commands in the window header can be used to select a layout state. Floating windows are always displayed on top of windows in all the other modes. If multiple windows are in the Floating mode, the active window will always be displayed on top of the other windows.Windows in the Floating mode can be attached to each other. If a pair of windows in the same mode have the Connectable property enabled (in the context menu of the window header), these windows can be attached to each other. To attach windows in the Normal mode with Floating property enabled, press Shift when moving the windows. You can also attach windows that are already attached to each other. If Connectable property is disabled, you cannot select the Docked or Hidden modes.For the Docked and Hidden modes, the Connectable property is always enabled and cannot be changed.The Docked mode requires special discussion. In this mode a window may be:

attached (docked) to one of the borders of the Designer window; �attached (docked) to any border of any other window with the � Docked property enabled;displayed above any other docked window (stacked windows). �

If the Docked mode is enabled for a window, this window is attached to one of the borders of the work area or to another window in the Docked mode.

Page 199: enterprise manual 1c

199Chapter 15. Ordinary Application Mode

To modify the size of a docked window, move the mouse cursor to a free border (turned to the work area). The cursor will change into a double arrow (horizontal or vertical). Drag the border with the mouse. If a window is in Floating mode, when you drag its border close to a work area border or to another Docked window, the window borders may change right away. If you release the mouse button at this time, the window will attach to a new border and its state will be changed to Docked. You can change the state of docked windows by dragging them with your mouse. To drag a window, left-click and hold the window header and drag the window to another location. The window state will be changed to Floating.There are several ways to attach multiple docked windows to the Designer window or another window border. Windows can be arranged in layers where each window occupies the entire width of the work area of the Designer window or another window. It is possible to arrange windows in sequence, so that each window will be located in one layer along the border of another window. If there are more than two windows docked, you can arrange some of them to be stacked in layers and the others in sequence.To arrange one docked window above another (create stacked windows), proceed as follows:

grab the window header with the mouse; �drag the window so that its header fits over the header of another docked �window. The dragged window should have a tab contour at the bottom;release the mouse button. �

Now tabs will show up at the bottom of the docked window. The tab text will be the same as the text in the window headers. Docked windows are contained in tabs.Click a tab to open the corresponding window. Clicking Close in this arrangement only closes the currently active tab.To detach docked windows, drag one of the windows away (you can monitor the process by watching the contour of the dragged window). If the mouse pointer remains in the tab area, you can change the tab order in this way. If some windows are docked to each other, you can attach more windows to them by dragging new windows to the tab area instead of the header. You can specify the tab order in this way.If Hidden mode is selected, an additional line appears on one side of the work area. This line contains window tabs, including a tab for the current window attached to this side of the work area. The location of this line is determined by the window location in the Docked mode. In this mode a window remains on the screen while it is active. Once another window is activated, the previous window becomes hidden.

Page 200: enterprise manual 1c

200 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

To display this window, move the mouse cursor over the tab of this window (do not click). When the mouse is moved away from the window, the window is automati-cally hidden.

Page 201: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 1

data CoMposItIon systeM expressIon

lanGuaGe

The data composition system expression language is intended for writing expres-sions used in various portions of the system, e.g. in data composition settings, to describe expressions of custom fields.

Literal ConstantsAn expression can contain literal constants. Literal constants can be as follows:

String �Number �Date �Boolean �

StringString literal is enclosed in double quotation marks (").

"String literal"

If you need to use double quotation marks within a string literal, use two such characters.

"Literal ""in quotation marks"""

Page 202: enterprise manual 1c

202 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

NumberA number is written without spaces, in decimal format. Its fractional part is sepa-rated by a period (.).

10.5200

DateA Date literal is written using the DATETIME key literal. This keyword is followed by a year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds in brackets separated by commas. Time is not required.

DATETIME(1975, 1, 06) – January the sixth, 1975DATETIME(2006, 12, 2, 23, 56, 57) – The Second of December, 2006, 23 h 56 m 57 s

BooleanBoolean values can be written using True and False literals.

ValueTo specify literals of other types (system enumerations, preset data), use the VALUE keyword followed by the literal name in brackets.

VALUE(AccountType.Active)

FieldsExpressions can use fields of data sets. A field is identified by data path. Parts of data path are separated by a period (.). Field name is not case sensitive.

Nomenclature.ArticleSales.SumTurnover

ParametersExpressions can use parameters. To use parameter in expression, simply write its name preceded with & character.

&Contractor&BeginDate

1.1. operatIonS WIth nuMBerS

Unary –

This operation is intended to change the sign of a number to its opposite.

–Sales.Quantity

Page 203: enterprise manual 1c

203Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

Unary +This operation does not perform any actions with numbers.

+Sales.Quantity

Binary –

This operation is intended for calculating the difference of two numbers.

BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance – BalanceAndTurnovers.ClosingBalanceBalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance – 100400 – 357

Binary +

This operation is intended for calculating the sum of two numbers.

BalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance + BalanceAndTurnovers.TurnoverBalanceAndTurnovers.OpeningBalance +100400 + 357

Multiplication

This operation is intended for calculating multiplication of two numbers.

Nomenclature.Price * 1.22 * 3.14

Division

This operation is intended for obtaining a result of dividing one operand by another.

Nomenclature.Price / 1.22 / 3.14

Remainder from Division

This operation is intended for obtaining a remainder from dividing one operand by another.

Nomenclature.Price % 1.22 % 3.14

1.2. operatIonS WIth roWS

Concatenation (Binary +)

This operation is intended for concatenation of two rows.Nomenclature.Article + ": "+ Nomenclature.Description

Page 204: enterprise manual 1c

204 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

LIKE

This operation checks whether the line matches the transferred template.The value of the LIKE operator is True if the expression value matches the template, and False otherwise.The following characters in template string make sense, different from a next line character:

% � – percent: a sequence containing zero or more random characters;_ � – underscore: a random character;[…] � – one or more characters in square brackets: any character listed within the square brackets. Enumerations can contain ranges, such as a–z, meaning a random character within the range, including limits of the range;[^…] � – negation mark in square brackets, followed by one or more characters: any character besides those listed after the negation mark;

Any other character represents itself only and does not have any additional use. If you must use one of the listed characters as itself, it must be preceded by ESCAPE.For example, the template below means a substring including the following sequence of characters: the letter A; the letter B; the letter C; a digit; one of the letters a, b, c or d; an underscore; the letter a; the letter b; the letter c. This sequence can start anywhere in the string.

"%ABC[0-9][abcd]\_abc%" ESCAPE "\"

1.3. Comparison operations

EQUAL

This operation is intended to compare two operands for equality.

Sales.Contractor = Sales.NomenclatureMainSupplier

NOT EQUALThis operation is intended to compare two operands for inequality.

Sales.Contractor <> Sales.NomenclatureMainSupplier

LESS THANThis operation is intended to check that the first operand is less than the second.

CurrentSales.Sum < PreviousSales.Sum

MORE THANThis operation is intended to check that the first operand is greater than the second.

CurrentSales.Sum > PreviousSales.Sum

Page 205: enterprise manual 1c

205Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

LESS OR EQUAL

This operation is intended to check that the first operand is less than or equal to the second.

CurrentSales.Sum <= PreviousSales.Sum

MORE OR EQUAL

This operation is intended to check that the first operand is greater than or equal to the second.

CurrentSales.Sum >= PreviousSales.Sum

IN Operation

This operation is intended to check presence of a value in the transferred list of values. Result of the operation is True, if the value is found, or False otherwise.

Nomenclature IN (&Product1, &Product2)

Operation to Check Value Presence in Data Set

Operation is intended to check value presence in the specified data set. The data set for checking must contain one field.

Sales.Contractor IN Contractors

The Operation for Checking the NULL value IS NULL

This operation returns the True value if the value is the NULL value.

Sales.Contractor IS NULL

The Operation for Checking a value for Inequality to NULL IS NOT NULL

This operation returns the True value if the value is not the NULL value.

Sales.Contractor IS NOT NULL

Logical OperationsLogical operations are accepted as operands of Boolean type expressions.

NOT Operation

The NOT operation returns True if its operand has the False value, or False if its operand has the True value.

NOT Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper

Page 206: enterprise manual 1c

206 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

AND Operation

AND operation returns True if both operands have the True value, or False if one of the operands has the False value.

Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper AND Document.Consignee = &Contractor

OR Operation

OR operation returns True if one of the operands have the True value, or False if both operands have the False value.

Document.Consignee = Document.Shipper OR Document.Consignee = &Contractor

1.4. aggregate functIonS

Aggregate functions perform certain actions on a set of data.

SUM

The SUM aggregate function calculates a sum of expression values transferred as an argument for all detailed records. The Array function result may be used as a parameter.

SUM(Sales.SumTurnover)

COUNT

The COUNT function calculates the number of values that are different from the NULL value. The Array function result may be used as a parameter. For instance:

COUNT(Sales.Contractor)

COUNT (DISTINCT)

This function calculates the number of distinct values. The Array function result may be used as a parameter.

COUNT(DISTINCT Sales.Contractor)

MAX

This function obtains the maximum value. The Array function result may be used as a parameter.

MAX(Balances.Quantity)

Page 207: enterprise manual 1c

207Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

MIN

This function obtains the minimum value. The Array function result may be used as a parameter.

MIN(Balances.Quantity)

AVG

This function obtains the mean value for values other than NULL. The Array func-tion result may be used as a parameter.

AVG(Balances.Quantity)

ARRAY

This function returns an array that contains a parameter value for each detailed record. If an expression specified in the parameter contains an Array function, this expression is considered an aggregate expression. An arbitrary-type expression will be specified as a parameter for this function. The value that returns a table of values may be used as a parameter. In this case, the Array function will result in an array that contains values from the first column of the value table transferred as a parameter.

ARRAY(ClauseCount)

VALUETABLE

This function returns a value table that contains the number of columns that matches the number of function parameters. Detailed records are produced from data sets necessary for obtaining all the fields used in function parameters expressions. If an expression contains a ValueTable function, this expression is considered an aggregate expression.The function may have one or more arbitrary-type parameters. Each parameter may be followed by an optional AS keyword and a name to be assigned to a value table column.

ValueTable(Different Nomenclature, NomenclatureCharacteristic AS Characteristic)

GROUP PROCESSING

This function returns a DataCompositionGroupProcessingData object with the following properties:

Data � . Type: a value table. The function populates this property with a value table containing the calculation results for the expression specified in the first parameter of the function for each group entry of the group. If the group is

Page 208: enterprise manual 1c

208 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

a hierarchy, each hierarchical level is processed separately, and hierarchical entry values are also included in the data.CurrentItem. � A row in the table of current values. When a user calls a CurrentItem for the overall, it will contain the Undefined value. The func-tion populates this property with a value table string for which the function is currently being calculated.ProcessingTempData. � A structure where data subtotals may be placed. Properties will be assigned unique names in different functions, since the same DataCompositionGroupProcessingData object may be transferred to several different functions in some scenarios.

This function has the following parameters:Expressions � . A string containing comma-separated expressions to be calculated. Each expression may be followed by an optional AS keyword and a column name in the final value table.HierarchyExpressions � . Expressions to be calculated for hierarchical entries. Similar to the Expressions parameter, but used for hierarchical entries. If the parameter is not set, expressions specified in the Expression parameter are used to calculate values for hierarchical entries.GroupName � . Name of the group in which processing group will be calculated. A string. Calculation is performed in the current group, unless otherwise speci-fied. If values are calculated in a table and the parameter contains an empty string or is not specified, the value is calculated for the group, i.e. a string. Template composer replaces this name with the group name in the final template when generating a data composition template. If the group is unavailable, the function will be replaced with the NULL value.

GroupProcessing (Sum(SalesVolume)

GROUPBY

This function deletes duplicates from an array. It returns an array or a value table with no duplicates.Parameters:

Array � or a value table.Value table column numbers or names where duplicates will be searched. �All columns by default. (Comma separated).

GETPART

This function returns a value table that contains specific columns from the original value table.

Page 209: enterprise manual 1c

209Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

Parameters: A value table to get columns from. �Column names or numbers to get (comma separated). �

Returned value: a value table that contains only columns specified in the Column numbers/names parameter.

ORDER

Used for ordering array elements.Parameters:

Array � or ValueTable.Value table column names or numbers to order by. No number needs to be speci- �fied for an array. Order direction Autoorder required. Desc/Asc + Autoorder.

Returned value: an array or a value table with the ordered elements.

JOINSTRINGS

An aggregate function to join strings.Parameters:

Values to join into one string � . If this is an array, array items will be joined into a string. If this is a value table, all columns and rows will be joined into a string.Item separator � . A string that contains the text to be used as a separator between array elements and value table rows. The line feed character is used by default.Column separators � . A string that contains the text to be used as a separator between value table columns. "; " is used by default.

1.5. other operations

CHOICE Operation

The CHOICE operation is intended to choose one of several values under certain conditions.

CHOOSE When Sum > 1000 Then Sum Else 0 End

Rules for Comparing Two ValuesIf types of compared values differ from each other, then the relationship between the values is defined based on the type priority:

NULL � (lowest)

Page 210: enterprise manual 1c

210 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Boolean �Number �Date �String �reference types �

The relationship between different reference types is defined based on table refer-ence numbers corresponding to one type or another.If the data are of the same type, then their values are compared according to the following rules:

for � Boolean type TRUE value is greater than FALSE;for � Number type common number comparison rules are applied;for � Date type earlier dates are less than later dates;comparison of the � String type takes place according to nationally established database features;reference types are compared according to their values (record number, etc.). �

Working with NULL ValueAny operation where one of the operands has the NULL value will result in a NULL value.The exceptions are:

the � AND operation will return NULL only if none of the operands has the False value;the � OR operation will return NULL only if none of the operands has the True value.

Operation PrioritiesOperations have the following priorities (the upper line has the lowest priority):

OR �AND �NOT �IN, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL �=, <>, <=, <, >=, � >Binary+, Binary- �*, /, % � Unary+, Unary- �

Page 211: enterprise manual 1c

211Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

1.6. FunCtions

EVAL

The EVAL function is intended for evaluating expressions within a certain grouping. This function has the following parameters:

Expression � – a string containing an expression to be calculated;Grouping � – a string containing a name of a grouping within which an expres-sion is to be calculated. If an empty string is used as a grouping name, evaluation will be performed within the context of the current grouping. If the Overall string is used as a grouping name, a calculation will be performed within the context of the grand total. In other cases calculation will be performed in the context of the parent grouping with this name.Calculation type � – the string containing the calculation type. If this param-eter is Overall, the expression will be calculated for all the records of the grouping. If the parameter value is Grouping, the values will be calculated for the current group record of the grouping.

SUM(Sales.SumTurnover) / EVAL("Sum(Sales.SumTurnover)", "Overall")

In this example the result will be the ratio of sum by the Sales.SumTurnover field of the grouping record to the sum of the same field in the entire composition.

EVALEXPRESSION

This function returns an expression for recording a specified group. This function has the following parameters:Calculated expression. A string that contains an expression for calculation.Group. A string that contains the name of the group for calculating an expression. If an empty string is used as a group name, values for the current group will be calculated. If the Overall string is specified, overall values will be calculated. If calculation is performed in a table and the parameter specifies the name of the group or string, or an empty string is specified, calculation will be performed for the group that lies at the intersection of the required calculation area (see the third parameter description) and the current string of the column group. If the parameter specifies the column group name, calculation is performed for the group that lies at the intersection of the column group calculation area and the current row group entry.Calculation area. A string that contains the calculation area. If an empty string is used as a calculation area, calculation is performed for the current entry of the group specified in the first parameter. If the Overall string is specified in the param-eter, calculation is performed for the overall of the group specified in the second parameter.

Page 212: enterprise manual 1c

212 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

If the parameter value is Group, values will be calculated for the current group entry of the group. If the parameter value is NonResourceGroup, then an expression will be calculated for the first group entry of the original group when calculating a function for the group entry by resources. When one is calculating the EvaluateExpression function with the NonResource-Group value for group entries that are not grouped by resources, the function is calculated in the same way as if with the Group parameter value. The data composition template composer outputs the expression calculated with the help of the EvaluateExpression function with the specified NonResourceGroup parameter into a template when generating a data composition template and output-ting a field, which is the resource to group by, into a template. Standard resource expressions are output for other resources in the resource group.If the parameter contains the Hierarchy string, the expression will be calculated for the parent hierarchical entry, if it exists, and for the whole group, if such an entry does not exist. When generating an expression for the "% in the hierarchy group" field, the template composer generates an expression that contains a ratio between the resource expression and the EvaluateExpression function for the resource expression calculated for the current group with the Hierarchy calculation type.Start. Specifies the entry to start a segment with in which expression aggregate functions will be calculated and the entry from which to get field values outside aggregate functions. A string containing one of the following:

"First". � Getting the first group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift from the beginning of the group may be specified in brackets after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with First(3)the third entry from the beginning of the group is received. If the first entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries. For example, if there are 3 entries and First(4) is specified, it is considered that there are no entries."Last". � Getting the last group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift from the end of the group may be specified in brackets after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with Last(3) the third entry from the end of the group is received. If the last entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries. For example, if there are 3 entries and Last(4) is specified, it is considered that there are no entries."Previous". � Getting the previous group entry is required. The expres-sion whose result will define the shift back from the current group entry may be specified in brackets after this word. For example, with Previous(2) the previous from the previous entry is received. If the previous entry is beyond the group (for example, receiving Previous(3) is

Page 213: enterprise manual 1c

213Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

required for the second entry of the group), the result would be the first group entry. If the previous entry is received for the total by group, the result would be the first entry.Next. � Getting the next group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift forward from the current group entry may be specified in brackets after this word. For example, with Next(2) the next from the following entry is received. If the next entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries. For example, if there are 3 entries and "Next" is specified for the third entry, it is considered that there are no entries. If the next entry is received for the total by group, it is considered that there are no entries."Current". � Getting the current entry is required. When receiving an entry for the total by group, the first entry is received. �"BoundaryValue". � It is necessary to receive an entry at the specified value. The boundaryValue keyword will be followed by a first order field expression in brackets, which value will start the fragment.The first entry with an order field value exceeding or equal to the specified �value will be used as an entry. For example, if the Period field is used as an order field, and this field has the values 01.01.2010, 01.02.2010 and 01.03.2010 and you need to receive a BoundaryValue (DateTime(2010, 1, 15)), an entry with the date 01.02.2010 will be received.

End. Specifies the entry to continue a fragment for calculating an aggregate expres-sion to. A string containing one of the following:

"First". � Getting the first group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift from the beginning of the group may be specified in brackets after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with First(3) the third entry from the beginning of the group is received.If the first entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries. �For example, if there are 3 entries and First(4) is specified, it is considered that there are no entries."Last". � Getting the last group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift from the end of the group may be specified in brackets after this word. The resulting value will be a positive integer. For example, with Last(3) the third entry from the end of the group is received.If the last entry is beyond the group, it is considered that there are no entries. �For example, if there are 3 entries and Last(4) is specified, it is considered that there are no entries."Previous". � Getting the previous group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift back from the current group entry may be

Page 214: enterprise manual 1c

214 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

specified in brackets after this word. For example, with Previous(2) the previous from the previous entry is received. If the previous entry is beyond the group (for example, receiving � Previous (3) is required for the second entry of the group), it is considered that there are no entries. If the previous entry is received for the total by group, the result would be the �last entry."Next" � . Getting the next group entry is required. The expression whose result will define the shift forward from the current group entry may be specified in brackets after this word. For example, with Next(2) the next from the following entry is received. If the next entry is beyond the group, the result would be the last entry. For �example, if there are 3 entries and Next is specified for the third entry, the result would be the third entry. If the next entry is received for the total by group, it is considered that there are �no entries."Current". � Getting the current entry is required. When receiving an entry for the total by group, the first entry is received. �"BoundaryValue". � It is necessary to receive an entry at the specified value. The keyword BoundaryValue will be followed by a first order field expres-sion in brackets, which value will start the fragment.The last entry with an order field value less than or equal to the specified value �will be used as an entry. For example, if the Period field is used as an order field, and this field has the values 01.01.2010, 01.02.2010 and 01.03.2010, and you need to receive a BoundaryValue (DateTime(2010, 1, 15)), an entry with the date 01.01.2010 will be received.

Sorting. A string containing comma-separated expressions to order the sequence by. If no string is specified, the values are ordered similarly to the group for which an expression is calculated. Each expression may be followed by an Asc keyword to group in ascending order or a Desc keyword to group in descending order, or Autoorder to group reference fields by fields to order the referenced object by. The keyword Autoorder may be used with both the Asc and Desc keywords.HierarchicalSorting. A string containing comma-separated expressions to order the sequence by. Used for ordering hierarchical entries. The elements will be ordered as described in the Sorting parameter, unless specified otherwise.IdenticalOrderValuesProcessing. A string containing one of the following:

"Together" � means that the previous and next entries are defined on the basis of order expression values."Separately" � means that a sequence of ordered entries is used to define the previous and next entries.

Page 215: enterprise manual 1c

215Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

For example, if the sequence is ordered by date.

1. January 1, 2001 M. Ivanov 102. January 2, 2001 S. Petrov 203. January 2, 2001 P. Sidorov 304. January 3, 2001 S. Petrov 40

When the Separately order is used to process identical values, entry 2 would be an entry previous to entry 3, while when the Together order is used, this would be entry 1. A fragment for the current entry to entry 2 if Separately is used would be entry 2, and entries 2 and 3 if Together is used. Therefore, the sum of the current entry for Separately would amount to 20, and to 50 for Together.If Together is specified in the Start and End parameters, shifts for the First, Last, Previous, and Next positions cannot be specified.Separately is used by default.

Use of Parameters. Practical ExamplesIf you need to calculate a stacked sum, use the following expression:

EvaluateExpression("Sum(SalesVolume)", , , "First", "Current")

If you need to receive a group value in the previous string, use the following expres-sion:

EvaluateExpression("Rate", , , "Previous")

The EvaluateExpression function takes into account group filters, but not hier-archical filters.The EvaluateExpression function may not be applied to a group in its group filtering. For example, you cannot use the EvaluateExpression("Sum(SalesVo-lume)", , "Overall") > 1000 expression in the Nomenclature group filter, but you can use it in a hierarchical filter.If a closing entry precedes an opening one, it is considered that there are no entries for calculating detailed data and aggregate functions.

When interval expressions are calculated for the overall (i. e., the second �parameter of EvaluateExpression function has an "Overall" value), it is considered that there are no entries for calculating detailed data and aggregate functions.

LEVEL

This function is used to obtain the current record level.

LEVEL()

Page 216: enterprise manual 1c

216 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

LEVELINGROUP

This function is used to obtain the level of the record in relation to the grouping root.

LEVELINGROUP()

VALUEISFILLED

Returns True if the value does not match the default value for this type, is not NULL, is not an empty reference, is not Undefined. For logical values it is checked for NULL. Strings are checked for absence of characters other than space.

SERIALNUMBER

This function obtains the next sequential number.

SERIALNUMBER()

GROUPSERIALNUMBER

This function returns the next sequential number in the current grouping.

SEQUENTIALNUMBERINGROUPING()

FORMAT

This function obtains a formatted string of the transferred value. The format string is set as defined by 1C:Enterprise format string. Options:

Value �Format string �

FORMAT(Invoices.SumDoc, "NFD=2")

BEGINOFPERIOD

This function is used to extract a certain date from a given date. Options:Expression � of the Date type;Period Type � – a string containing one of the following values:

Minute ○Hour ○Day ○Week ○Month ○

Page 217: enterprise manual 1c

217Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

Quarter ○Year ○Ten days ○Six months ○

BEGINOFPERIOD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Month")

Result:01.10.2009 0:00:00

ENDOFPERIOD

This function is used to extract a certain date from a given date. Options:Expression � of the Date type;Period Type � – a string containing one of the following values:

Minute ○Hour ○Day ○Week ○Month ○Quarter ○Year ○Ten days ○Six months ○

ENDOFPERIOD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Week")

Result:13.10.2009 23:59:59

DATEADD

This function is used to add values to a date. Options:Expression � of the Date type;Increase type � – a string containing one of the following values:

Second ○Minute ○Hour ○Day ○

Page 218: enterprise manual 1c

218 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Week ○Month ○Quarter ○Year ○Ten days ○Six months ○

Size � – the size of date increase. Number Type. Fractions are ignored.

DATEADD(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), "Month", 1)

Result:12.11.2009 10:15:34

DATEDIFF

This function is used to obtain differences between two dates. Options:Expression � of the Date type;Expression � of the Date type;Difference type � – one of the following values:

Second ○Minute ○Hour ○Day ○Month ○Quarter ○Year ○

DATEDIFF(DATETIME(2009, 10, 12, 10, 15, 34), . DATETIME(2009, 10, 14, 9, 18, 06), . "Day")

Result:2

CURRENTDATE

Returns system date. During composition of template composition all the expres-sions available in the composition will have the CURRENTDATE function replaced with the value of the current date.

CURRENTDATE()

Page 219: enterprise manual 1c

219Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

SUBSTRING

This function is used to extract a substring from a string. Options:expression of string type; �the position of the character where the substring is to begin; �the length of the extracted substring. �

SUBSTRING(Contractors.Address, 1, 4)

STRINGLENGTH

This function is used to define a string length. The first option is an expression of string type.

STRINGLENGTH(Contractors.Address)

YEAR

This function is used to obtain a year from a Date type value. The only option of the function is an expression of Date type.

YEAR(Invoice.Date)

QUARTER

This function is used to obtain a quarter number from a Date type value. The quarter number is in the range from 1 to 4. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

QUARTER(Invoice.Date)

MONTH

This function is used to obtain a month number from a Date type value. The month number is in the range from 1 to 12. The only option of the function is an expres-sion of the Date type.

MONTH(Invoice.Date)

DAYOFYEAR

This function is used to obtain the day of the year from a Date type value. The day of the year is in the range from 1 to 365 (366). The only option of the function is an expression of Date type.

DAYOFYEAR(Invoice.Date)

Page 220: enterprise manual 1c

220 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

DAY

This function is used to calculate the day of the month from a Date type value. The day of the month number is in the range from 1 to 31. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

DAY(Invoice.Date)

WEEK

This function is used to obtain the week number from a Date type value. Numbers of a year are enumerated from 1. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

WEEK(Invoice.Date)

WEEKDAY

This function is used to obtain the day of the week from a Date type value. The day of the week is in the range from 1 (Monday) to 7 (Sunday). The only option of the function is an expression of Date type.

WEEKDAY(Invoice.Date)

HOUR

This function is used to obtain the hour (24 hour clock) from a Date type value. The hour of the day is in the range from 0 to 23. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

HOUR(Invoice.Date)

MINUTE

This function is used to obtain the minute number from a Date type value. The minute of the hour is in the range from 0 to 59. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

MINUTE(Invoice.Date)

SECOND

This function is used to obtain the number of second from a Date type value. The second of the minute is in the range from 0 to 59. The only option of the function is an expression of the Date type.

SECOND(Invoice.Date)

Page 221: enterprise manual 1c

221Appendix 1. Data Composition System Expression Language

CAST

This function is used to retrieve a type from an expression that can contain a composite type. If the expression contains a type other than the required type, NULL is returned. Options:

Converted expression � ;Type � – the string containing the type string. For example, Number, String, etc. In addition to primitive types, the string can also contain a table name. In this case the function attempts to cast to the table reference.

CAST(Data.Attribute1, "Number(10,3)")

ISNULL

This function returns the second parameter value, if the first parameter has the NULL value. Otherwise, the first parameter value is returned.

ISNULL(Sum(Sales.SumTurnover), 0)

Page 222: enterprise manual 1c

222 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 223: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 2

text edItor

The 1C:Enterprise text editor provides users with all the basic functions needed to edit texts. The text editor allows you to perform operations on text blocks and to perform search and replace functions. Since operations in all the text editors are similar, in this Appendix we describe only those features of the text editor that are specific to the 1C:Enterprise.

2.1. edItIng text docuMentS

The process of editing a text document includes the following steps:creating a new document or opening an existing document �entering and editing text �saving edited text �printing, if necessary �

These steps are reviewed below in details.

2.2. creatIng and openIng a text docuMent

To create a new text document, use the File – New menu item. Select Text Document when prompted and click OK. An empty document will be opened in the text editor.Use File – Open menu item to open an existing text document. The standard file open dialog will appear.In this dialog, select the document file. In the File type field you can select the format of the text document to be opened.

Warning!

If a document is opened with the Read only attribute, this document cannot be edited. If the properties palette is opened (select Change – Properties), then in the

Page 224: enterprise manual 1c

224 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Status line the document property will be given as Text open for reading. If the document Read only attribute has not been enabled, then in the Status line the document property is given as Text open for writing.

You can simultaneously create or open multiple documents in different windows.

2.3. SelectIng an extenSIon for a text docuMent

The Text item of the main menu contains commands to specify the extension for the text document.Available values: Text, Text Template, HTML. The text editor mode for the field will be selected automatically depending on the selected extension. By default (when you create a new document), a document is assigned the Text extension.To learn more about editing of module texts, see "1C:Enterprise 8.2. Developer Guide".

2.4. InputtIng and edItIng text

Text is entered by typing the required characters on the keyboard. The characters that you type in will be entered next to the cursor – a blinking vertical line. When entering and editing text, the current position of the cursor (the line number and the position in the line) is displayed in the application status bar.You can view the size of the document (the number of characters and lines) and the editing mode by selecting Edit – Properties.

2.4.1. Moving the cursor

When editing text, you can move the cursor in the standard manner.

2.4.2. go to a text line

To go to a specific line in a document, select Go to Line from the context menu, and in the displayed prompt enter the line number and click Go To.

2.4.3. using Bookmarks

In the process of editing, you can mark any lines of text to quickly access the marked lines subsequently. These markers are called bookmarks.To set a bookmark, place the cursor in the line of text you wish to bookmark, and then select Text – Set/Clear Bookmark. The set bookmark will be displayed as a blue circle in the leftmost column of the text editor window.

Page 225: enterprise manual 1c

225Appendix 2. Text Editor

You can remove a bookmark by selecting Text – Set/Clear Bookmark again when the cursor is located in the bookmarked line.To move between lines of text that have been bookmarked, use Text – Next Bookmark, Text – Previous Bookmark. For moving between bookmarks: when you reach the end or beginning (depending on the search direction), the next command will move the cursor to the first or the last bookmark (loopback).The Text – Remove Bookmark command removes all the bookmarks from the text. Bookmarks are automatically removed when a document is closed.Bookmarks are not saved when closing the document.

2.4.4. Selecting Blocks of text

You can select a block of text in the standard manner.To select all the text in the document at once, select Edit – Select All.To select a single word only, use Ctrl + W keyboard shortcut.

2.4.5. operations on Selected Blocks

You can move, copy or delete a block of text like in other Microsoft Window appli-cations.To format the text structure, it is useful to use text shift. Select one or more lines of text (if you select one line, then you must select the end of the line; if there are multiple lines, you can select them in part), then use Text – Block – Increase Indent or Text – Block – Decrease Indent. The text editor shifts the selected lines to the specified direction on the tab space.

2.4.6. deleting text

You can delete text in the standard manner.

2.4.7. Inserting a page Break

To insert a page break, select Text – End of Page. The page break will be repre-sented by the § symbol. When printing, a new page will begin in this text location.

2.4.8. undo changes

If you make a mistake when editing a document, the text editor allows you to auto-matically return the text to its previous state. To undo an action, select Edit – Undo.This will undo the last action results. The Undo Changes operation can be used several times in a row. To redo (restore) such actions, you can select Edit – Redo.

Page 226: enterprise manual 1c

226 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

2.4.9. Search and replace

1C:Enterprise text editor allows you to find any sequence of characters in a text document and replace it with another sequence.Search. Use the Edit – Find command to perform a search. The search parameters dialog will open.

Fig. 200. Search parameters setup dialog

Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog.Check the Match case option to make search case-sensitive. If you check the Find whole words only option, you can only find whole words and not parts of words.The Direction group allows you to specify the search direction: Forward – to the right and below the current position of the cursor; Backward – to the left and above the current position of the cursor.Click the Find button after specifying the search parameters. The specified sequence will be highlighted if it is found.You can repeat the search in the Forward direction by selecting Edit – Find Next menu item or by pressing F3.You can repeat the search in the Backward direction by selecting the Edit – Find Previous command or by pressing Shift + F3.

Warning!

When the search reaches the end of the document, it continues from the beginning and vice versa.

Replace. Use the Edit – Replace command to replace a string of characters. The replace parameters dialog will open.

Fig. 201. Replace parameters setup dialog

Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog. Enter the replacement text into Replace field.Check the Match case option to make the search case-sensitive. If you check the Find whole words only option, you can only find whole words and not parts of words.

Page 227: enterprise manual 1c

227Appendix 2. Text Editor

The Replace in group allows you to specify the search range – within the selected text (block of text) or throughout the entire document.Click Find after specifying the find and replace parameters.The searched for item will be highlighted in the text if found. To replace the located string of characters, click Replace. The string will be replaced and search will continue.Click Replace All to replace all the occurrences of the required string.

Warning!

When the replace procedure reaches the end of the document, it continues from the beginning and vice versa.

2.4.10. Saving a text document

To save a text document, select File – Save. If you are saving the document for the first time, a standard dialog will be displayed where you should specify the name of the new document and, if required, the directory where it is to be saved.You can select the file format in the File type field, just like when you open a docu-ment.To save an existing document with a different name, select File – Save As. A standard dialog for saving files will be displayed where you should specify the name of the new document and, if required, the directory where it is to be saved. After saving a document under a new name, the file with the old name remains on disk.

2.4.11. printing a text document

page Setup. In the page setup mode, you can configure a printing device, specify paper size and orientation, etc. Use File – Page Setup to open this mode. This will display the Page Setup dialog, where these settings can be edited.

Fig. 202. Page setup dialog

Page 228: enterprise manual 1c

228 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The Printer field allows you to select one of the printers connected to your computer for printing. By clicking the button, you can open the list of these printers and select the required one by clicking its name in the list. You can similarly select the paper size and the paper tray.The Margins group allows you to indicate the distance between the edge of the sheet of paper and the text being printed. The text that does not fit within the specified width will be carried over to the next page.Click OK after you specify all the required parameters to save them. By clicking the Cancel button, you can cancel the page setup modifications.print preview. The print version of a document may be previewed before printing. Use the File – Print Preview menu item for this purpose.printing a Document. You can print a document using a dialog for print param-eters setup or without this dialog using the standard printer settings (and the current printer). In the former situation, use the first Print line. The standard print setup dialog will open.In this dialog select the required print parameters (printer, page range, number of copies) and click OK to proceed to printing.If you want to use current print options, select File – Print with current settings (Ctrl + Shift + P).To view the list of keyboard shortcuts used in the text editor, open Help when using the application.

2.4.12. Closing text Documents

You can close a text document in the standard manner. Since text documents are mostly used to provide the user with some information, you can simply press Esc to close a document. If the text document was not modi-fied, it is simply closed; otherwise you will be prompted to save the document.

Page 229: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 3

spreadsheet doCuMent edItor

You can use a dedicated spreadsheet editor to create various print forms in 1C:Enterprise. This section will go over the main principles of working with spreadsheet docu-ments.

3.1. SpreadSheet docuMentS In 1c:enterprISe

The spreadsheet editor in 1C:Enterprise looks like standard electronic spreadsheets, however it is different. 1C:Enterprise spreadsheets, like any other spreadsheets, consist of rectangular cells arranged in rows and columns.Each column and row has its own unique number. Columns and rows are numbered independently from each other. Numbering starts at 1 at the top left corner of a spread-sheet. Therefore, any cell may be identified by a row number and a column number.In addition, some cells and cell ranges (rectangular groups of cells) may be named, for convenience. Use the Names window and properties palette to assign names and manage them.The top cell of a column is referred to as the column header. It contains the column number and can also be used to highlight a column and to change column width. The leftmost cell of a row is referred to as the row header. It can be used to perform all the actions on it as on the column header.A spreadsheet document can be generated by the application (for reports or data processor) or by a user. It can be saved (if required) to disk in a file. Spreadsheet documents are usually ready print forms that can be used independently.

Page 230: enterprise manual 1c

230 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.2. operatIonS WIth SpreadSheet docuMentS

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor can be used to create, view and edit spread-sheet documents. Reports usually display the results of data processing in the form of a spreadsheet document. The user can also create a new spreadsheet or view reports previously saved to a file as a spreadsheet document. Regardless of the document’s origin, the spreadsheet editor is used to edit such spreadsheets.

3.3. creatIng and openIng SpreadSheet docuMentS

Use the File – New menu item to create a new spreadsheet document. Select Spreadsheet Document in the prompt and click OK. An empty document will be opened in the spreadsheet editor.Use File – Open menu item to open an existing spreadsheet document. The standard file open dialog will appear.Select the document you need in this dialog. In the File type field you can select the format of the spreadsheet document to be opened.

3.4. SavIng SpreadSheet docuMentS

You can save any spreadsheet document to a file so that you can open, view and print it later on. To save a spreadsheet document, select File – Save. When saving a new document, a save file dialog is displayed prompting you to enter the name of the file and the directory where it is to be saved. When saving an existing edited text document, this dialog will not be displayed.To save a spreadsheet document under a different name or in another format, select File – Save As. Spreadsheet documents are usually saved in a special format used by 1C:Enterprise to store spreadsheet documents. These files have the *.mxl extension. You can also save spreadsheet documents in other formats: Excel spreadsheet (*.xls extension), HTML document (*.htm extension), text file and UNICODE text file (*.txt exten-sion), spreadsheet document v7.х (format of the previous 1C:Enterprise versions), Excel95 spreadsheet (*.xls extension), Excel97 spreadsheet (*.xls extension), Word document (*.docx extension), Excel2007 sheet (*.xlsx extension), ODF spreadsheet (*.ods extension).To do so, select the required file format in the Save As: field.

Page 231: enterprise manual 1c

231Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

NOTE 1

Please note the following limitations when exporting DOCX documents:When you are outputting the text with a specified orientation, the text is dis-• played horizontally or vertically depending on the text angle.When you are outputting a • Text-type picture, the text is always displayed with horizontal orientation.

The text is laid out in the Wrap form only. Other types of text layout are output in the Wrap form.If at least one border of the rectangle is displayed, all its borders are displayed.

NOTE 2

When you open an XLSX document in versions of Microsoft Excel below 2007, the output colors may not match the original colors of the spreadsheet document.

When multiline cell text is output to a spreadsheet document, the contents are enclosed in double quotes, and double quotes within the multiline string are replaced with two double quotes.Saving in Excel spreadsheet format saves the document in the default Microsoft Office Excel format (equivalent to Excel97 spreadsheet). Spreadsheets saved as HTML documents may be viewed in any HTML document viewer, e.g. in Microsoft Internet Explorer. HTML documents are saved in HTML-4 format that preserves most formatting parameters. When converting a spreadsheet to HTML format, pictures and charts are preserved as well.

3.5. cloSIng SpreadSheet docuMentS

You can close a spreadsheet document in the standard manner. Since spreadsheet documents are mostly used to provide a user with information (reports), pressing Esc is sufficient to close a document. If a spreadsheet document was not modified, it is simply closed; otherwise you will be prompted to save the document.

3.6. vIeWIng SpreadSheet docuMentS

navigating in spreadsheets. As in the standard Microsoft Windows interface, the spreadsheet document window always contains only a part of the spreadsheet document that is located below this window. Click on any cell in the visible area to navigate to this cell. The selected cell is activated. Scroll bars are used to display unseen portions of the spreadsheet on the screen.For convenient scrolling of a large document, you can press the mouse scroll wheel and select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on the distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse wheel was pressed (specifically designated).

Page 232: enterprise manual 1c

232 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Managing a spreadsheet view. Use the Table – View submenu items to configure view of various areas and components of a spreadsheet document: column and row headers, grid, etc. Let us briefly describe the View menu items. All menu items and buttons work as radio buttons: when an item is selected (clicked), the corresponding area is displayed or hidden.

Menu item ActionDock the table Locks the top rows and left columns of a spreadsheet document so that

they will always be displayed when the document is paged throughShow grid Toggles display of the spreadsheet grid (thin lines that separate cells)Show Headers Manages display of the row and column headers in a spreadsheet docu-

mentShow Groups Shows and hides groups – the areas to the left of the row header or

above the column headerEdit Locks or unlocks spreadsheet documentsShow comments Toggles display of commentsBlack and white view Toggles display of colors specified for the spreadsheet document. When

this item is selected (checked in the menu), all the colors will be defined by Microsoft Windows operating system settings

Page view mode Toggles display of a minimum number of rows (depends on the entered information), print area, page breaks

Scale Performs a discrete image scale

Image scale. You can discretely scale a spreadsheet document view for your convenience. Use the Table – View – Scale submenu to select the image scale: when this item is selected, a submenu opens for selecting the desired scale for the spreadsheet document.Scale can also be changed using the mouse with a scroll wheel. Press and hold Ctrl, and turn the mouse wheel. Turn the wheel forward to zoom in or backward to zoom out.Fixation (headers). In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor, the top rows and left columns may be docked so that they are visible on the screen when you scroll through a spreadsheet document. This is convenient when information is viewed in large tables. In this case, the column and row headers of a spreadsheet document will always be visible. To fix the top rows, select the entire row of the spreadsheet document and select Table – View – Lock Table menu item. All the rows above the selected one will be docked.To lock a spreadsheet column, select the entire spreadsheet column. All the columns to the left of the selected one will be docked.To lock spreadsheet rows and columns simultaneously, select one cell of the spreadsheet. All the rows and columns to the top and left of the selected cell will be docked.

Page 233: enterprise manual 1c

233Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

If a spreadsheet document contains docked rows and/or columns, use the Dock the Table menu item again to unlock them.Setting as Read-Only. To prevent editing of a spreadsheet document, use Table – View – Change menu item that should be unchecked. If a cell contains text that does not completely fit in the visible area, hovering the mouse pointer over the cell will result in displaying the text in a tooltip. If the text is too large to be displayed in a tooltip, only part of the text will be displayed. When editing this text, a tooltip will not be shown, as long as you do not move the mouse pointer.Scrolling in a spreadsheet document. Use the standard Microsoft Windows methods to view information in spreadsheet documents. If your mouse has a scrolling wheel, rotate it to scroll through the spreadsheet contents. Press and hold Shift for horizontal scrolling.

3.6.1. names

Names may be assigned to some spreadsheet cells, cell ranges and graphical objects.Use the Names dialog to manage names. To name an element, select it, open the Names dialog using Table – Names – Names… menu item, enter the name into the text box and click Assign.

Fig. 203. Names dialog

To delete a name, select it from the list and click Delete. Click Select to select the area corresponding to the selected name. Click Close to close the dialog.When a row or multiple rows (a column or multiple columns) are selected entirely and this area is named, when in the Show Named Rows/Columns mode, area names will be shown at the left (for rows) or in the top (for columns). Internal named areas are shaded when the Show Named Cells mode is enabled. The name of an area is displayed in the center of the area.Spreadsheet document areas that have no user-assigned name are automati-cally named by the application. These names are not displayed in the Names dialog. They can be viewed in the properties palette. You cannot assign

Page 234: enterprise manual 1c

234 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

a name to an area, if this name matches the one generated automatically. These names look as follows:

R5C7 � – a cell in row 5, column 7;R5C7:R8C15 � – for a rectangular cell range between rows 5 and 8 and columns 7 and 15;R6 � – for row 6;R3:R9 � – for rows 3–9;C2 � – for the second column;C11:C20 � – for a range of columns from 11 to 20;D12 � – for a figure where 12 is the sequential number of a graphical object;T � – for the entire spreadsheet document.

Area names are unique for each document, i.e., different areas must have different names. Area names are not case-sensitive.

3.6.2. cell text Input

We will consider any combination of characters containing letters, numbers, punc-tuation marks, spaces, and special characters as text. Numbers in a cell are also considered to be text.Text may be entered into any cell of a spreadsheet document. When a document or a report is formatted, the cell text is processed based on specified cell properties and is moved to the final report upon processing.Text may be entered and text attributes specified only in active cells. To activate a cell, left-click it.To enter a text into an empty cell, you should simply start typing. The cell will switch to editing mode; an insertion point (blinking vertical line) will appear in the cell, and you will see the text being entered into the cell. Press Enter when you finish typing. Text editing can also be completed by clicking any unselected cell. This is the same thing as pressing Enter.If an edited cell contained any text, this text will be replaced with the new text.If you want to edit text in a cell without replacing it but adding to the already avail-able text instead, press Enter or F2 or double-click the cell before typing the text. The cell will switch to the editing mode, and you will be able to located the cursor to any position in the text using the mouse or arrow keys.

Warning!

Note the Shift + Enter keyboard shortcut. Using this shortcut allows you to start a new text line in a cell without finishing editing the cell. You can also move to a new line using this shortcut when entering text into the Text field of the property palette of a cell.

Page 235: enterprise manual 1c

235Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

Press Esc before leaving the editing mode to cancel all the changes you have made.If text does not fit into a cell, it will be shown in the neighboring cells of the same row (depending on the text alignment).If you want to enter the same text into multiple cells, select these cells and enter the required text into the Text property. To put the text into cells, click the Save button on the toolbar of the properties palette. You can also copy the required text into the clipboard, select any group of cells and paste the text from the clipboard.Any text angle may be used in cells. Select the cells where text is to be arranged at an angle and specify the required angle from -360○ to 360○ in the Orientation property.A comment may be created for any cell of a spreadsheet document. A comment may contain any text that describes the cell. A cell with a comment is marked by a red triangle in the upper right corner. If the Show Comments mode is enabled, the text of the comment is always displayed. If this mode is disabled, the comment is displayed as a tab on mouse-over for a cell.When you are entering cell values in the Wildcard property, you can specify a wild-card that will define the string entry of symbols. Editing keys. All the Microsoft Windows keys and keyboard shortcuts can be used for editing text in spreadsheet document cells. If you make a mistake when working with a spreadsheet document, you can undo your actions. The editor has a special feature for this purpose. Use the Edit – Undo menu item to undo last action. You can undo all the actions that you have performed after opening or creating a spreadsheet document. Use the Edit – Redo menu item to redo the previously undone actions.

3.7. SelectIng cellS, roWS, and coluMnS In a SpreadSheet

All spreadsheet data can be edited in active cells. Some operations may be performed for a random group of cells or for a cell range (a rectangular group of cells).Before performing these operations, the corresponding cell, cell range or a group of cells in a spreadsheet document must be selected. The column and row numbers of a selected group are also selected. This selection makes it easier to determine the group location.Use the standard Microsoft Windows methods to select an element (cell) or a group of elements in a spreadsheet document.Click any cell to remove the selection.

Page 236: enterprise manual 1c

236 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.8. Search and replace

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor can be used to search for any sequence of characters in a spreadsheet document and replace it with any other sequence of characters.Search. Use the Edit – Find command to perform a search. The search parameters dialog will open.

Fig. 204. Search in a spreadsheet document

Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field of the dialog. The search template string is unlimited.Check the Match case option to make the search case-sensitive. Check the Entire cells option to search only for the cells that exactly match the source text.There are eight methods for searching a document. Select the option you want in the Direction group and View list. All the search methods are cyclical.Use the Direction group to specify the general search direction: Forward – move ahead (right/down) from the current position, Back – move back from the current position.Use View list field to specify the range and order of the search directions:

By columns � – search the current column; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the column, move to the next cell in the general direction; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the document, move to the beginning (end);By rows � – search current row; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the row, move to the next cell in the general direction; upon reaching the end (or begin-ning) of the document, move to the beginning (end); In current column � – search the current column; upon reaching the end (or begin-ning) of the column, move back to the beginning (end) of the column;In current row � – search the current row; upon reaching the end (or beginning) of the row, move back to the beginning (end) of the row.

Click the Find button after specifying the search parameters. If a cell is found with a specified sequence of characters, this cell will become the current cell.You can repeat the search in the Forward direction by selecting Edit – Find Next menu item or by pressing F3.

Page 237: enterprise manual 1c

237Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

You can repeat the search in the Backward direction by selecting the Edit – Find Previous command or by pressing Shift + F3.Replace. Use the Change – Replace command to replace a string of characters. The replace parameters dialog will open.

Fig. 205. Replace setup in a spreadsheet document

Actions in the dialog are similar to those used to search for information. Enter the replacement text into Replace field.You cannot choose the direction of the replace function. It goes Forward.Click Find after specifying the find and replace parameters.If a cell is found with a specified sequence of characters, this cell will become the current cell.To replace the located string of characters, click Replace. The string will be replaced and search will continue.Click Replace All to replace all the occurrences of the required string.

3.9. changIng roW heIght and coluMn WIdth

Row height and column width can be resized automatically or manually.Resizing row height and column width manually. To change row height, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row header until the cursor changes to a double vertical arrow. Now the header border can be moved to specify the required row height.To change column width, move the mouse cursor over the right border of column header until the cursor changes to double horizontal arrow. Now the header border may be dragged to specify the required column width. Double-click the header border to specify the minimum column width. The editor will analyze text in all the cells and will select the column width to fit all the texts into the columns.Column width and row height can be adjusted with your mouse while holding Ctrl down. Press Ctrl and hover the mouse pointer over the border of any cell in the required column or row. The cursor will change its shape. Specify the required size.

Page 238: enterprise manual 1c

238 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

This method is convenient when column and row headers are not displayed (usually for spreadsheet documents located in forms).Resizing row height and column width automatically. To modify the width of a column, select the required column. Then select Table – Format – Column width. In the displayed prompt, indicate the required column width and click OK – the width of the column will be adjusted according to the specified value.

Fig. 206. Spreadsheet document editor. Column width

For automatic calculation of row height depending on the text height, check Auto row height. If Maximum row height is checked, the maximum possible row height is specified in this field. If the actual row height is less than the specified height, the row will be displayed with the actual height. If the actual height is greater than the maximum value, the row height will be set to the maximum value. In this case the row will be partly invisible. If Maximum row height is unchecked, the row height will always be set as the actual height.If Auto row height is unchecked, the Row height field specifies fixed row size. Automatic column width is set differently from automatic row height. When a new spreadsheet document is created, all the columns in this document have a standard width that equals the width of nine symbols of the default spreadsheet font. The default column width may be adjusted. To do so, highlight the entire spread-sheet document, select Table – Format – Column Width and enter the new default column width as a number of characters in the default font. When you click OK, the width of all the columns will be adjusted to match the new value. When you select Auto, the column width value for the entire spreadsheet document will be used. If Auto is specified as column width value for the entire spreadsheet document, all the columns will have a width of 9.The column width can be changed using the same procedure used for row height adjustment.If cells contain information and you need to set minimum column width or row height, double-click the column or row separator. The program will determine maximum height or width of the text and resize the cell so that the entered text fits.

3.10. MovIng and copYIng cellS

Any cell or range of cells may be moved to a different location in a spreadsheet document. It is actually the text and formatting attributes of a cell, not the cell itself that is moved. Cells may also be copied, moving the formatting attributes of the source cell to other cells in a spreadsheet document.

Page 239: enterprise manual 1c

239Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

Moving cells. To move a cell or a range of cells:select a cell or cell range to be moved; �move the mouse over cell border so that the pointer changes into an arrow � ;drag the cells to the new location. �

If cells need to be moved to a hidden area of the spreadsheet, move the mouse to the border of the visible area of the spreadsheet, and it will scroll automatically.Copying cells. The mouse may also be used to copy cells or cell ranges. The proce-dure is the same as for moving, the only difference being that you press and hold Ctrl key while copying the cells.Using clipboard. The Microsoft Windows clipboard may also be used to move and copy cells. Blocks of neighboring cells may also be copied. You can use the M button on the toolbar to copy to the clipboard (Copy to Clipboard as Number). This button results in cell contents copied to the clipboard as a number (if the copied cell contains a number). If a cell range is selected, clicking the M button will copy the sum of all the numbers in the selected cells to the clipboard.The cell copy remains in the clipboard until the clipboard is cleared or some other information replaces it. This feature may be used to create multiple copies of the same cell. For example, you can copy one cell, select a block of cells and use the Paste command to paste the contents of the clipboard to every cell in the block. In this manner several neighboring cells can be copied, however, remember that the block size (number and order of cells) should be divisible by the size of the copied cells. Otherwise, a warning will be displayed: Selection does not correspond to insertable block.If the Paste Special command is used instead of the Paste command, the following dialog will be displayed.

Fig. 207. Special Paste setup for a spreadsheet document

Use these options to specify what should be inserted into a spreadsheet: the entire cell, text only, the cell values, format, outline, comments or names.

Page 240: enterprise manual 1c

240 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Use Replace column formats to preserve the original column format (for details, see "Specifying Varying Column Widths" on the page 241), set in the source document.Enhanced dragging. You can also use the right mouse button to move and copy cells. This operation is referred to as enhanced dragging. The procedure is the same as for the left mouse button, the only difference being that when the button is released, a context menu is displayed.

Fig. 208. Context menu of enhanced dragging

Use this menu to specify the operation: moving, copying or copying with special paste. The operation can also be cancelled from this menu.

3.11. addIng and deletIng cellS

Adding and removing cells, columns or rows to an existing spreadsheet is often required.Adding a row (column). The following steps should be followed to add a row or a column to a spreadsheet document (new rows are inserted above the selected row, and new columns are inserted to the left of the selected row):

select the number of rows or columns that you want to insert at the location �where they are to be inserted;select � Table – Insert menu item.

Deleting a row (column). To delete a row or a column:select the rows or columns to be deleted; �select � Change – Delete menu item.

Selected rows or columns are deleted from spreadsheets with all text that is located within them. They are replaced with rows below or columns to the right.Inserting a cell. A new cell may be inserted anywhere in an existing spreadsheet.To insert a cell:

select a cell at the position where you want to insert a new cell; �select � Table – Insert menu item;select where cells will be moved in order to make room for the new cell: Horizon- �tally – cells to the right will be moved, or vertically – cells below will be moved;сlick � OK.

Inserting a range of cells. A range of cells can be inserted into a spreadsheet docu-ment if needed.To insert a range of cells:

select the cell range of the same size and at the same place where you want to �install a new cell range.

Page 241: enterprise manual 1c

241Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

select � Table – Insert menu item.select where to move the cells in order to make room for a new range: horizontally – �the cells to the right will be moved, or vertically – the cells below will be moved;click � OK.

Deleting a range of cells. To delete a range of cells:select a range of cells to be deleted; �select � Change – Delete menu item;specify what range will replace the deleted range: Horizontally – cells to the �right will replace the deleted range, vertically – cells below will replace the deleted range;click � ОK.

3.12. SplIt cellS

The 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor may be used to split cells in spreadsheets.To split a cell, highlight it and select the Table – Split Cell menu item. This will display a prompt to choose the split type.

Fig. 209. Selecting a cell split

If you select horizontal splitting, the result will be as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 210. Horizontal cell split

Vertical splitting is performed in the same way.

3.13. SpecIfYIng varYIng coluMn WIdthS

In the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor you may specify a different column width for different rows. Select one or more rows of a spreadsheet documents as shown below.

Fig. 211. Spreadsheet document editor. Multiple rows selected

Page 242: enterprise manual 1c

242 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Place the mouse pointer over the column separator, left-click and drag the sepa-rator to the right or left while holding the mouse button down. Release the mouse button. You will be prompted to confirm the action. The following message will be displayed: New row format will be created for the selected rows. Click OK. Now the template will look as follows:

Fig. 212. Spreadsheet document editor. New row format

3.14. hIdIng and ShoWIng roWS and coluMnS

For more convenient viewing, you can hide and show different rows and columns in a spreadsheet in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor. Let us use the currency rate report as an example.

Fig. 213. Currency rate report

As we see from the spreadsheet, the rate did not change for the first 9 days. There-fore, we may hide this information. To do so, we will select the rows from 5 to 13 and use Hide item from the context menu.

Page 243: enterprise manual 1c

243Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

The report will look as follows:

Fig. 214. Currency rate report. Rows 5 to 13 hidden

Note that the row numbering indicates that there are hidden rows. To display hidden rows of a spreadsheet document, highlight any area that includes the hidden elements (in this case we select rows from 4 to 14) and select the Show command from the context menu. Select the entire spreadsheet to show all the hidden areas.

3.15. Merge cellS

When a document print form template is created, text must often be entered into an area that is occupied by several cells (both horizontally or vertically). The merge feature may be used to arrange text in multiple cells. If multiple cells are merged, the text is aligned by the borders of the merged cells.To merge cells, select the required cell range and use the Table – Merge menu item. All the text in the merged cells will be lost except for the text in the upper left cell, which becomes the text of the merged cell.To split a merged cell, select it and use the Table – Merge command again.If the merged cell contained text, it will go to top left cell upon merging, notwith-standing formatting conditions (e.g. it could be located in the bottom right corner of the merged cell having been moved to the right horizontally and to the bottom vertically).

3.16. WorKIng WIth naMed areaS of SpreadSheet docuMentS

A name may be assigned to a group of cells in a spreadsheet to manipulate an area using 1C:Enterprise script tools. It is convenient to use named areas for creating report templates. Named areas for spreadsheet documents are not important and are not displayed, as they are in a template.

Page 244: enterprise manual 1c

244 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

A template is constructed of building blocks that comprise a report. These building blocks are named areas.

3.16.1. creating a named area

There are horizontal named areas (consisting of selected rows), vertical named areas (consisting of selected columns) and rectangular named areas (consisting of neighboring cells).To create a named area, select the required area and use Table – Names – Set Name menu item. In the dialog, specify the name of the area.

3.16.2. named area viewing Mode

Named rows and columns may be viewed when the Table – Names – Show Named Rows/Columns mode is enabled.Area names are shown between the headers and the area itself.You may view rectangular named areas when the Table – Names – Show Named Cells mode is enabled. Area names are shown in shaded areas. The name is located in the middle of the area.

3.16.3. deleting a named area

To delete a named area, select this area and use the Table – Names – Remove Name command.

3.16.4. resizing named areas

If a named area consists of more than one row or column, you can resize it by selecting rows or columns inside the area and using the Table – Insert command.If an area consists of one row or column, it may not be expanded. The name must be removed and the named area created again.To reduce the size of a named area, select the required number of rows or columns to be deleted and use the Delete command from the context menu.You can do the same for rectangular areas. If you select individual cells instead of rows or columns, the area cannot be resized.

3.17. WorKIng WIth SpreadSheet docuMent groupS

You can join selected rows or columns together to view spreadsheet data more conveniently. Internal or external groups can be created, deleted or expanded (by adding addi-tional rows or columns). Nested or external groups can be created as well.

Page 245: enterprise manual 1c

245Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

3.17.1. creating a group

There are horizontal groups (consisting of marked rows) and vertical groups (consisting of marked columns).To create a group, first select the rows or columns and then use the Table – Groups – Combine to Group command.

Warning!

You cannot create a group for several sequential cells.

3.17.2. viewing groups

Groups may be viewed when the Table – View – Show Groups mode is enabled.Groups are shown by markers with thin lines that specify group size.

Fig. 215. Groups in a spreadsheet document

You can manage the grouped rows and columns. There are special markers that you can use to simplify this process. There are two groups of markers (for levels and for groups). Level markers are numbered and located in the upper left corner of the spreadsheet. Markers are displayed if the header view is enabled (Table – View – Show Headers/Footers). The marker with the highest number is used to display all groups. Click on each previous marker to hide all the groups of the current level. This does not influence external groups.

Page 246: enterprise manual 1c

246 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

The group label is placed to the left of the rows or on top of the columns. There are two states: group is shown and group is hidden (see fig. 215). Use these markers to manage the view of individual groups. Click on the group marker. The group will be hidden if it has previously been shown and will be shown if it has previously been hidden. The appearance of the marker will change. The row or column that is located near the marker is referred to as the totals row. You can change the position of the totals row. For horizontal groups, the totals row may be located at the top or at the bottom of a group. For horizontal groups, the totals row may be located to the left or right of the group. Use the Total Horizontally and Total Vertically properties to set the position of the totals row. When the posi-tion of the totals row is changed, the group marker position also changes. Totals row positioning properties are applied to all the groups of a spreadsheet.

3.17.3. deleting a group

To delete a group, highlight it (all the rows or columns of the group) and select the Table – Group – Remove from Group command.

3.17.4. resizing groups. nested and external groups

A group may be resized (by adding or removing rows or columns), and nested or external groups may be created.Expanding groups. To expand a group:

select rows or columns to be included in a new group; �select � Table – Groups – Combine to Group.

Depending on the position of the selected range and existing group, the editor will do one of the following:

if the selected area of rows or columns does not cross existing groups, a new �named group will be created;if the selected area of rows or columns partially coincides with an existing �group, the existing group will be expanded to the selected neighboring rows or columns;if the selected area of rows or columns is located inside an existing group, a new �named group within an existing group will be created;if the selected area of rows or columns completely contains an existing group, �a new external named group will be created, and this group will contain an existing group.

Reducing groups. To reduce a group:select the required rows or columns; �select � Table – Groups – Remove from Group.

Page 247: enterprise manual 1c

247Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

Depending on the position of the selected range and existing group, the editor will do one of the following:

if the selected area of rows or columns does not overlap existing groups, nothing �will be done;if the selected area of rows or columns is located within an existing group, �nothing will be done;if the selected area of rows or columns partially coincides with an existing �group, the selected rows or columns will be removed from the group;if the selected area of rows or columns completely contains an existing group, �the group will be deleted.

The picture below is an example of nested and external groups.

Fig. 216. Sample nested groups

A first level group Department 07 (an external group) contains two nested groups for Office 1 and Office 2. These groups are external as related to employee groups.

3.18. uSIng graphIcal oBjectS

Graphical objects may be used in spreadsheets. They help to improve the document appearance and make some minor additions to form descriptions without changing the template structure.Graphical elements include lines, rectangles, ellipses, texts, pictures, embedded objects (OLE-objects) and charts.A Text object in the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor consists of text in a frame.Below, we will describe working with all the graphical objects except OLE objects.Graphical object properties are described in detail in sections of the manual refer-ring to these objects.This section describes ways to place graphical objects into a spreadsheet.

Page 248: enterprise manual 1c

248 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.18.1. Inserting graphical objects

Graphical elements can be inserted into a spreadsheet by selecting the Table – Pictures command from the menu using the standard Microsoft Windows procedure. Use the properties palette to customize graphical objects.To insert a picture, first select a cell in the spreadsheet document that should be the location for the upper left corner of the picture, and select Table – Pictures – Picture. The picture selection dialog will open.

Fig. 217. Picture selection dialog for insertion into a spreadsheet document

A picture can be selected from a library (from the Library list) or inserted from a file. To insert a picture from a file, click the Select from file button. A standard file open dialog will be displayed. You can specify the name of the picture file in this dialog. If a file name is not specified, a place for a picture will be reserved in the spreadsheet. Pictures are inserted in their original size.If a file is selected, you can specify a transparent color for the picture. As a rule, background color is made transparent so that it does not cover information under the picture.The picture is always inserted as is. You can modify the size of the area for picture placement. To do so, select the Picture object and drag the object border or object corner in the desired direction. Press and hold the Shift key if you want to preserve the area aspect ratio.Use the Picture size property to specify the method of picture placement:

Real size � – the picture is inserted in its original size. If the actual size is smaller than the area size, the rest of the area remains empty. If the actual size is larger than the area size, only part of the picture will be shown.Stretch � – the picture is completely fitted into the area, no matter what the picture size is.Proportionally � – the picture is displayed with its original proportions. The smallest picture dimension that can fit in the area is selected. Another dimen-

Page 249: enterprise manual 1c

249Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

sion is calculated proportionally to the first dimension, and the picture is placed in the area.Tile � – the picture is always inserted with its original size. If the area is larger than the original picture, the picture is tiled.AutoSize � – if the picture completely fits in the field, it will be displayed in its original size; if the picture is too large, it will be displayed in a proportional size.

Standard graphical objects (rectangle, oval and text) may be transparent or filled with different colors. By default, graphical objects in spreadsheets are completely filled with color. A fill type can be selected in the Pattern property of the Background category. Background color and pattern color may also be specified. The Line Style property can be used to specify the line (border) style for inserted graphical objects and the Line Color property – to specify its color.

3.18.2. linking graphical objects

Inserted graphical objects are automatically linked to spreadsheet cells. Objects are linked by the top left and bottom right corners. When column width or row height between these corners is changed, the object size also changes.

3.18.3. Selecting and resizing graphical objectsTo manipulate a graphical object it must first be selected. It can be selected in two ways: by direct selecting or using the graphical object selection mode. For direct selection, just click on an object. If a rectangle, oval or text is selected, eight small square marks will appear around it: four in the middle of each side of object frame and four in the corners. Any graphical object can also be resized. To do so, use the marks that appear around the object (or a group of objects) when it is selected. Size may also be adjusted in the standard Microsoft Windows way.By holding down the Shift key and dragging the corner mark, the object size will change proportionally to the current size. You can also use arrow keys with pressed Shift key to resize an object.If a line is selected, marks will appear only at the beginning and end of the line. When the mouse is moved while Shift is held down, only the line length is changed, without changing its angle.Use the following method to select multiple graphical objects: select the first object, press and hold down the Shift key, and select all the remaining objects. To clear object selection, click any empty area of the spreadsheet document.In the latter case, graphical objects can be selected by drawing a rectangle with the mouse. All graphical objects in this rectangular area will be selected. The selection mode is enabled using the Table – Pictures – Select Drawing Objects.

Page 250: enterprise manual 1c

250 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Select the Table – Pictures – Select Drawing Objects command again to disable the graphical object selection mode.

3.18.4. aligning groups of graphical objects

Graphical objects may be aligned using the Alignment toolbar. Toolbar commands are available if more than one object is selected.

Align Left � – aligns the left borders of the selected objects. Left borders are placed along the same vertical line.Align Right � – alignment of the right borders.Align Top � – alignment of the top borders.Align Bottom � – alignment of the bottom borders.

A selected group of objects may also be centered horizontally or vertically. Use the Center Align Vertically and Center Align Horizontally commands for this purpose. The object axis will be aligned.

3.18.5. Setting the graphical object group Size

The Alignment toolbar may be used to set the same size for all the objects in a group. An object with marks shown in the fig. 218 is selected as the source. This object is referred to as the master object. Other objects have markers displayed as black squares.

Fig. 218. Selecting equal width of objects in a spreadsheet document

Click an object to make it the master object.Same Width � – sets the same width for all the objects in a group.Same Height � – sets the same height for all the objects in a group.Same Size � – sets the same size for all the objects in a group.

Page 251: enterprise manual 1c

251Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

3.18.6. Moving and copying graphical objects

Any graphical object can be moved within a spreadsheet. You can also copy any graphical object by creating multiple objects based on a single template object.Moving graphical objects. To move a graphical object, drag it to the new location. A dotted border (or line, if you move a line) will help you to place the object in the spreadsheet.Graphical objects can also be moved using arrow keys.Copying graphical objects. To copy a graphical object, drag it to the new location while holding down the Ctrl key.If you release the Ctrl key when moving an object, the object will be moved instead of copying.Using clipboard. The Microsoft Windows clipboard can also be used to move and copy graphical objects.Object (or object group) position is defined as follows: the upper left corner of an imaginary rectangular frame surrounding inserted objects is placed onto the upper left corner of an active cell in a spreadsheet.

3.18.7. changing graphical object orderWhen several graphical objects are overlapping, it is important to specify their order to achieve the required effect. A new graphical object is always placed in the foreground and covers all the objects behind it. Graphical objects have a layered structure, where every object belongs to a layer. The top layer contains the object that is always in the foreground. Menu commands can be used to move an object to the background (bottom layer), to the foreground (top layer) or to move it one layer up or down.To move an object, select it and choose one of the commands from Order submenu in the context menu:

Bring to Front � – to move the object in front of all the other objects.Send to Back � – to move the object to the background.Move Up � – to move the selected object one layer up.Move Down � – to move the selected object one layer down.

3.18.8. deleting graphical objects

To delete a graphical object, select it and use the Edit – Delete command. You can delete an object by selecting the cell range that contains it. If the entire object is not selected, it will not be deleted from the spreadsheet, however, its size may change.

3.18.9. grouping graphical objects

You can group several graphical objects into a single group.

Page 252: enterprise manual 1c

252 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

To group graphical objects, select several objects.

Fig. 219. Selecting multiple graphical objects

Use the Table – Pictures – Group command.

Fig. 220. Grouped graphical objects

You can work with a new graphical object consisting of several grouped objects as you would with any regular graphical object.You may ungroup a composite object if needed. To do so, select a composite graphical object and use the Table – Pictures – Ungroup command.

3.18.10. graphical object names

Graphical objects, like spreadsheet cells, can be named. Use the Names dialog to assign names (Table – Names menu item).In the Designer mode default names are assigned to all the new graphical objects. Default names consist of the letter D and the sequence number of the graphical object.

3.18.11. Working with charts

The spreadsheet editor can be used to insert charts into spreadsheet documents. A chart is a special graphical object used to insert various charts, graphs and diagrams into documents. You can create a chart using the 1C:Enterprise script tools (in reports) or by inserting it for spreadsheet data analysis. The section below will describe how to place a chart in a spreadsheet.

3.18.12. creating charts

To create a chart:select the � Table – Pictures – Chart command;use your mouse to draw a rectangle of the desired size in the area where you �want to place the chart;enter the range of cells containing the source data for the chart (you can change �the range at any time).

Page 253: enterprise manual 1c

253Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

If you first select the cell data range, then you will not need to enter the range in a prompt displayed when inserting a chart. When a chart is inserted, it automatically displays the data specified in the selected area.After creating a chart, you must activate it, for example, by double-clicking it and customize it using property values in the properties palette.

3.18.13. chart data area

A chart can be configured for a spreadsheet document so that it can use spreadsheet document data.Suppose that a spreadsheet document contains data.

Fig. 221. Spreadsheet document. Chart data area

To create a histogram based on this data:select the area of cells containing the table (marked with a frame in this example); �select the � Table – Pictures – Chart command;insert the chart. �

The spreadsheet document will now contain the chart that displays the data in graphical form. You can configure the chart appearance, header, area size, chart colors, and many other parameters, using the properties palette of the chart.

Fig. 222. Spreadsheet document. Inserting a chart

Use the toolbar to customize the chart (Edit – Properties in the main menu).

Page 254: enterprise manual 1c

254 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.19. WorKIng WIth ole oBjectS

Microsoft Windows applications normally can use embedded objects, that are also referred to as OLE objects. An OLE object is a part of the current document that is created by another Windows application. An OLE object, like any other graphical object, constitutes an integral part of the document. The only difference is that those objects are edited in another application, the one where they were initially created.To create an OLE object:

use the � Table – Pictures – Insert Object command;use your mouse to draw a rectangle of the desired size in the area where you �want to insert an OLE object;select the type of an embedded object when prompted. �

A Windows application for editing objects of this type will open. The Designer mode window layout will change the main menu, context menus, and the toolbar will contain functions and commands specific to the new application.Warning!

Programs for OLE objects creation are not included in the distribution kit. These are separately licensed products running under Microsoft Windows. To obtain help regarding use of the opened application, refer to the documentation supplied with the application.

edit the OLE object if required. �finish the OLE object editing by clicking anywhere in the spreadsheet work area �outside of the object.

When an OLE object is created, it shares all the properties of standard graphical objects: you can resize and relocate it, copy it using your mouse or clipboard, combine with other objects or delete it. For details on these operations, see "Using graphical objects" on the page 247.In addition, an OLE object can be modified, i.e. you can change its contents. Double-click an OLE object to edit it. The Windows application where it has been created will open, and you will be able to use it to edit the embedded object.

3.20. WorKIng WIth SpreadSheetS In "teMplate" Mode

Templates (for reports, documents, etc.) are usually prepared during configuration designing. However, an external spreadsheet (the one stored in a file) can also be used as a template.

3.21. general prIncIpleS of teMplate deSIgn

Constructing a template consists of "drawing" the constituent parts, i.e. the blocks that will be used to "assemble" the resulting form. Since nearly all the business

Page 255: enterprise manual 1c

255Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

documents have a rectangular structure, it is best to create templates for these docu-ments in an editor that supports rectangular elements.That feature is provided by the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor. In the process of creating a template you can enter various text into spreadsheet cells; assign format-ting parameters both for text and for the entire cells; adjust spreadsheet row heights and column widths; insert drawing items into the template (lines and boxes, other graphical objects, including pictures, OLE objects and charts, and various controls). It I also possible to define the appearance for the entire spreadsheet or for individual cells or cell groups.In its final form, the template will be a combination of rectangular areas, each of which is used to yield some part of the prepared document or report: an area for the title (name, dates, etc.), an area for headers, one for tabular section, etc.

Fig. 223. Template in a spreadsheet document

You can assign a unique name to every rectangular area of a template so that you can refer to it later on.The process of constructing a report based on a template goes as follows:

First, a document or a report is constructed as an empty spreadsheet. Remember �that a template is not directly linked to the finished report. A template is a sort of a wizard, a certain set of areas for which a report is made by the program module.When processing a report algorithm from a template, area names are taken in �the required order, translated (variable names are replaced with their values) and copied to the prepared report. The report generation script permits expansion of reports both horizontally and vertically.Another way of constructing a report is when the user enters data in spread- �sheet document cells designated for the report and these data are processed by the program using a formula given in the report spreadsheet document itself. The results will appear in different cells of the spreadsheet document. Now the report is ready to be viewed and printed.

Page 256: enterprise manual 1c

256 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

3.22. prInt Setup

We recommended enabling the page view mode (Table – View – Page View mode) to view the results of some of the settings described here.

3.23. headerS and footerS

Headers and footers are areas at the top and at the bottom of pages that contain text that repeats on every page of the document: page number, document name, date and time of creation, other information.Use the Table – Print Options – Headers and Footers... menu item to create a header or a footer for the document. This command opens a dialog where you specify whether you want to create the header or footer and to enter the text and style for headers and footers.For each header or footer, the starting page, location and font must be specified.

3.24. pagInatIon

When large spreadsheet documents are printed, the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor performs automatic document pagination in compliance with page settings. Automatic pagination takes page breaks and fixed page elements positions into consideration.Position settings are not transferred from spreadsheet documents to final documents.Manual page break. To force page breaks, use the Table – Print Options – Insert Page Break command.To insert a horizontal page break, select a cell or a row in your spreadsheet and use the Table – Print Options – Insert Page Break command. A page break will be added above the selected cell or row. Page breaks are marked with dotted lines.To remove a page break, select a cell or a row under an existing page break and use the Table – Print Options – Remove Page Break command.To insert a vertical page break, select a column in a spreadsheet and use the Insert Page Break command. A page break will be added to the left of the selected column. It will be marked with a dotted line.To remove a vertical page break, select a column to the left of the page break and use the Table – Print Options – Remove Page Break command.position on page. The position can be specified for any row or column (or a range of rows or columns) on page. To do so, select the range and check the Beginning of page or Keep with Next property of the Paragraph category in the properties palette (for Cells). To change the position on a page, reselect this range and uncheck the Beginning of page or Keep with Next property.

Page 257: enterprise manual 1c

257Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

3.25. auto repetItIon of roWS and coluMnS

Repetition may be specified for any row or column in a spreadsheet (or for a range of rows or columns). To do so, select a row or a range of rows (a column or a range of columns) and use the Table – Print Options – Running Area command.The selected range will be placed on the first page in the same way it is placed in the spreadsheet, that is, in accordance with its position on the sheet related to the column and row headers. On the subsequent pages, repeated rows will be located in the top of every page, while columns will be located on the left of the page.Repetitions may be removed from each page using the Table – Print Options – Remove Repetition command. This setting will be disabled for all the ranges where it has previously been enabled.Auto repetition settings for rows and columns are not transferred from spreadsheets to final documents. You can also view and change repetition areas in the properties palette for spreadsheets.

3.26. SpecIfY prInt area

Instead of printing an entire spreadsheet, you can use the editor to specify a certain area for printing.To specify a print area, select a range of cells in the spreadsheet and use the Table – Set Print Area command.You can cancel the print area selection using the Table – Remove Print Area command.For a spreadsheet document, you can also specify the print range in the properties of the spreadsheet’s property palette.

3.27. page Setup

In the page setup mode, you can configure a printing device, specify paper size and orientation, etc. Use File – Page Setup menu item to initiate this mode. This will display the Page Setup dialog (see fig. 224).The controls in this dialog operate mostly in a standard manner for many Microsoft Windows applications. We will describe only some 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet document editor-specific features. Copies per page. Copies per page control can be used to specify the number of copies that will be printed on one page (copies are placed one after another). If this option is set to Auto, the application will determine the number of copies automatically: If two copies of a document fit one page with the selected paper size and page margins, two copies will be printed; otherwise only one copy will be printed.

Page 258: enterprise manual 1c

258 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 224. Page setup dialog

Headers and Footers. The Headers and Footers group is intended to specify the dimensions of the page area that will be allocated for headers and footers. The dimensions are specified in millimeters and are calculated from the top or bottom margin toward the corresponding edge of the page.Scale. Use the Scale field to specify the scale for printing a spreadsheet. The speci-fied scale does not influence the viewing scale in the editor.Fit to page width. If this mode is enabled, the spreadsheet document editor will automatically scale the spreadsheet in such a way that the width of the document will fit on one sheet of paper.Black and white. If this option is checked, all the document colors will be ignored, and the document will be printed in black and white.

3.28. prIntIng a SpreadSheet docuMent

print preview. The print version of a document may be previewed before printing. Use the File – Print Preview menu item for this purpose.The Next and Previous buttons may be used to open the next or previous page of the viewed document, and the 2 Page/1 Page button is intended to toggle between one-page and two-page view.Use your mouse or the Maximize and Minimize buttons to change the image scale.If the mouse pointer is located within the viewed document, click it to increase the image scale. There are three fixed viewing scales. When you click a document while viewing it at the largest scale, it will be shown with the smallest scale again.Click Maximize to increase the scale by one; click Minimize to reduce scale by one.Click Close to exit the print preview mode.The document will be displayed with the print options specified in the page setup dialog. These parameters include paper size, print area borders, scale, etc. The row and column placement parameters specified in the spreadsheet editor will also be

Page 259: enterprise manual 1c

259Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

used. These parameters include manual page breaks, row and column repetition, row and column position on page, etc.printing a document. Use the File – Print command to print a document. The standard print setup dialog will open.In this dialog select the required print parameters (printer, page range, number of copies) and click OK to proceed to printing.

3.29. edItIng SpreadSheet and cell propertIeS

Use the properties palette to configure a spreadsheet, cell or group of cells.Spreadsheet document properties can be used to specify movement direction when hitting Enter, print area, repeating parts of a document, etc. Cell or cell group properties can be used to specify the information type, informa-tion view and format for a cell, cell dimensions and other parameters.When a spreadsheet document is opened or created, the property palette displays the cell properties. To switch to viewing and editing spreadsheet document proper-ties, select Spreadsheet Document at the top row of the properties palette. To view and edit properties of a cell or a group of cells, pick Cells at the top row of the properties palette.

3.29.1. Spreadsheet document properties

Use the properties palette of the spreadsheet document to configure its properties. Pick Spreadsheet Document at the top row of the properties palette to view the spreadsheet document properties. Template – if this option is checked, this document is a template.Total Horizontally – the specified totals column for a horizontal group (see "Deleting a Named Area").Total Vertically – the specified totals column for a vertical group (see "Deleting a Named Area").Picture – select a background picture (see "Specifying a Background Picture for a Sheet" on the page 261).Fixed background – if this option is checked and if you select a background picture, the background picture does not move when you scroll through a spreadsheet docu-ment. Otherwise, the background picture is scrolled with the document.Move on Enter – this property selects the direction for movement when Enter is pressed. Possible options: No – no movement; Down – move to a cell under the current one; Right – move to a cell to the right of the current one.Print area – specifies the printable spreadsheet document area (see "Print Area Definition").

Page 260: enterprise manual 1c

260 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Repeating Rows – specifies the rows of a spreadsheet document that will be printed on every new page (see "Print Area Definition").Repeating Columns – specifies the columns of a spreadsheet document that will be printed on every new page (see "Defining Repeating Rows and Columns").The appearance of groups and headers may also be configured by selecting the text and background colors.If you plan to use the spreadsheet document in the future, use the Save Settings option to store the view settings for the document (display of headers, grid, groups, names, fixation position, etc).The Total Horizontally and Total Vertically options contain the rows and columns that constitute a logical part of a group, but should remain visible when the group is minimized. Let us consider an example with the Total Vertically option (set to Top). The source data table is shown in the figure below:

Fig. 225. Source data table

When you click the first level marker, the table transforms to:

Fig. 226. First level data

We obtain the totals for a division. When you click the second level marker, the table transforms to:

Fig. 227. Second level data

Page 261: enterprise manual 1c

261Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

We obtain the totals for departments. When you click the third level marker, the table transforms to:

Fig. 228. Spreadsheet document. Third level marker clicked

We obtain the totals for employees.

3.29.2. Specifying a Background picture for a Sheet

You may use a picture from the picture library or an external file as a background for a spreadsheet document.To pick a background picture, click the selection button in the Picture option of the properties palette.

Fig. 229. Selection button in the picture property

The picture selection window will open:

Fig. 230. Selecting a background picture for a spreadsheet document

Select a picture from the library or from a file. You can make any color of the picture transparent (remove it). To do so, click Set transparent background. The mouse pointer will change. Move the mouse over the color you want to make transparent and left-click it. You can cancel transparency by clicking Clear transparency.Click OK to apply the background.

Page 262: enterprise manual 1c

262 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Fig. 231. Spreadsheet document with applied background

Click the Clear button in the background picture window to remove the background picture from your spreadsheet document.Check the Fixed Background option if you do not want the background picture to be scrolled with the spreadsheet document.

3.29.3. print area definitionIf you want to print a part of the spreadsheet document but not the entire docu-ment (e.g., a sequence of rows or columns or a group of cells), use the Print Range property to specify the print area for the spreadsheet. You may also specify the print area by entering the range, e.g. R5C7:R8C15 for a rectangular cell range, or R3:R9 for rows 3-9 or D12 for a figure, or by specifying the area name. If you use the area name, it is automatically replaced with the corre-sponding range when you enter it.You may specify the print area in the Range dialog that can be opened by clicking the selection button in the Print Range option.

Fig. 232. Specifying print area for a spreadsheet document

Page 263: enterprise manual 1c

263Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

When this dialog is opened, use your mouse or keyboard (see "Names" on the page 233) to specify the required range and click the Range selection button. The selected range will be specified in the Print Range option.You can also specify the print area using menu commands (see "Print Area Defini-tion" on the page 257).

3.29.4. defining repeating rows and columns

When developing a report, remember that spreadsheet documents sometimes do not fit on a single page. In these cases, it is more convenient if column or row headers of the spreadsheet document are shown on every page for lengthy or wide spreadsheets. You may use the 1C:Enterprise spreadsheet editor to configure the view of the spreadsheet documents. Use the repeating rows and columns definition mechanism for this purpose. Use the Repeating Rows option to specify a repeating rows area or the Repeating columns option to specify a repeating columns area. For details on specifying a range, see "Print Area Definition".

3.30. cell propertIeS

Individual cells or cell groups can be configured in a spreadsheet document.Use the cell properties palette to configure cells. To view and edit properties of a cell or a group of cells, pick Cells at the top row of the properties palette.Editable and viewable properties can be set for all the selected cells in a spreadsheet document. If an option is changed, the new setting will be applied to the entire selected area.

3.30.1. Main property category

Text – the text located in a cell. This property is displayed if the Template category does not contain the Value property, and the FillType property of the Template category has the Text or Template value.Location – the Location option specifies how text should be displayed if it does not fit into a cell (see the table below).

Text location Details

Auto Text that does not fit in the width will be displayed in neighboring cells if they do not contain text

Clip The visible part of the text will be limited by the left and right cell borders

BlockThe visible part of the text will be limited by the left and right cell borders; all the characters in the visible part will be replaced by # symbols. (Used when misinter-pretation is possible. Example: a number)

Wrap Text that does not fit in the width will be moved to the next lines of the cell

Page 264: enterprise manual 1c

264 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Name: the name of the area.Protection – if this option is enabled, the selected cells and pictures are protected from modification (if Read Only option is enabled for the spreadsheet document).Hyperlink – if this option is checked, the details processing mode turns on when this cell is clicked. The Selection event handler procedure is called for a spread-sheet document in a form, and if the True option is set for standard processing, the Detail processing event handler procedure is executed. If the spreadsheet docu-ment is used independently (e.g. as a report execution result), standard processing is called (e.g. if a cell contains a reference to the Nomenclature list item, the form for the item will open). For details, see description of the Detail parameter property below.

3.30.2. position property category

Horizontal – specifies horizontal alignment of text in a spreadsheet document cell.

Left Text is aligned by the left cell borderRight Text is aligned by the right cell borderCenter Text is placed along a vertical line running through the cell center.Justify Text is aligned by the left and right cell borders. Cells are automatically configured so

that the text is completely visibleAuto Depends on cell content type. For example, the Left alignment will be selected for rows,

and the Right alignment will be selected for numbers

By selected columns – if this option is checked, the text in the leftmost cell of the selected area will be located in accordance with the selected horizontal position for the entire selected area. This mode is used to center text in several cells in a row.Vertical – specifies vertical alignment of text in a spreadsheet document cell.

Bottom Text is aligned by the bottom cell borderTop Text is aligned by the top cell borderCenter Text is aligned along a horizontal line running through the cell center

Orientation – specifies the text angle in a cell (varies from -360о to 360о). Indent – indentation from the cell border that was used for text alignment in a cell. AutoIndent – if this option is set to more than 0, indentation will be defined as a product of the grouping level and property value when groupings are used.The Indent and AutoIndent are not mutually exclusive.

3.30.3. appearance property category

This properties category is used to configure font (type, size, style, color), negative number highlighting, background and pattern color, cell borders (border visibility, line style), etc.

Page 265: enterprise manual 1c

265Appendix 3. Spreadsheet Document Editor

Click the selection button to configure border appearance. The line selection dialog will open.

Fig. 233. Line selection dialog

You can configure a line by selecting its type and thickness.The dialog contains a sample of the selection.If you do not need to display the line for the entire length of the side of the cell area, check Indent. In this case the line will be displayed with the spaces from the cell edges. For example:

Fig. 234. Low cells border with indent

Page 266: enterprise manual 1c

266 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 267: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 4

htMl doCuMent edItor

4.1. purpoSe

HTML editor is a tool to create hypertext documents (HTML documents).

4.2. creatIng htMl docuMent

To create an HTML document, select the File – New command. When the docu-ment type selection dialog opens, select HTML document and click OK. A blank document window will appear available for editing.The Edit tab provides the WYSIWYG mode for editing, while the Text tab displays the HTML-formatted document for editing. The Preview tab renders the document for you to view the results of your work.

4.3. SavIng

You need to save an HTML document into a file to be able to open, edit and view it in the future. To do so, select the File – Save command.In the file save dialog, select the directory and type in a file name. Click Save.

4.4. edItIng

Creating an HTML document is similar to working with a regular text editor.However there are some differences. For example, you can insert pictures, HTML tables (later in this chapter we will use the term table), labels and links to other documents.

4.5. enterIng text

Text input is described in detail in the "Text Editor" paragraph. Here we only discuss the issues specific to editing an HTML document.

Page 268: enterprise manual 1c

268 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

4.6. forMattIng text

You can format the HTML document; for example, you can set up your own style (font, size, italic, indents, alignment etc.). When you copy a text from other text editors, e.g. from Microsoft Office Word, the original formatting of the text is retained.

4.7. InSertIng and edItIng a taBle

You can add tables to HTML documents. To do so, select the Table – Insert Table command. A dialog will open for you to enter the number of rows and columns.If you find out later in the course of editing that the specified number of rows or columns is not sufficient, more items can be added.To edit a table (insert or delete rows, columns and cells), use the commands from the Table menu of the main menu.Item of the Table Menu ActionsInsert Row Adds a new row above the current oneDelete Row The current row is deletedInsert Column A new column is inserted to the right from the current oneDelete Column The current column is deleted

Insert Cell A new cell is inserted into the table to the left from the current one. All the cells on the right are shifted

Delete Cell Deletes current cell. All the cells on the right are shifted to the left.

Merge CellsMerges two cells: the current cell and the one to the right from it. The information entered into these cells is also merged. If you need to merge more than two cells, repeat this operation as many times as required.

Split Cell Splits the current cell into two cells

4.8. InSertIng a pIcture

You can insert pictures into your HTML document. To insert a picture, select the Element – Picture command. A dialog will open for you to type in the path to the picture file (a path and a file name) or to select a file in the standard file selection dialog. In the Text field, enter tooltip text that will be displayed as a floating popup in the view mode when the user hovers a mouse pointer above the picture. If required, specify the picture alignment (the way picture is to be located in the document) in the Position attributes group.

Alignment Option ActionsNot specified A picture is in the text Left A picture is in a new row and attached to the left border of the documentRight A picture is in a new row and attached to the right border of the documentAbove the Text A picture is in a text aligned towards the center of the picture

Page 269: enterprise manual 1c

269Appendix 4. HTML Document Editor

Alignment Option ActionsBottom A picture is in a text aligned towards the bottom of the pictureCenter A picture is in a text aligned towards the center of the pictureTop A picture is in a text aligned towards the top of the picture

If you want to place a picture in a frame, type in a border width in the Border dialog box attribute. If the width is not defined or is 0, the border is not displayed. Click OK to insert the picture.You can change the attributes specified in the dialog using the picture properties panel.You can move this picture. To do so, point to the picture and drag the mouse to the required location in the document. The Alignment picture property does not change; for example, if neither Left, nor Right is selected, you can add a picture to the text, otherwise that picture will be in a new row.You can copy a picture. You can copy it in a standard manner (using the clipboard or your mouse with the Ctrl key pressed).You can place a picture anywhere in HTML document (the text, table or label).

4.9. laBel

A label is a special object of an HTML document. It is an area where you can place some text, table, picture or other labels. When a label is displayed, the nested objects scroll continuously from right to left. To insert a label, select the Element – Marquee command. You can resize the label. To do so, select the label and drag the label marker with your mouse.You can add labels to a text and a table.

4.10. lInKS

You can create links for hypertexts in an HTML document. Select a text or a picture object, and use the Element – Link command. The dialog is displayed to create a link.

Fig. 235. Link creation dialog

Provide the path to a hyperlink or bookmark name in the Address attribute. Click OK to create the link.

Page 270: enterprise manual 1c

270 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

You can format the selected object in compliance with the style of the hyperlink. It is usually a blue underlined text. A picture is placed inside a blue border.In the view mode when you point your mouse to an object with a link, the pointer changes its shape to a pointing hand.

4.11. BooKMarKS

You can create bookmarks for internal references within the current HTML docu-ment. Select a text or a picture object, and select the Element – Bookmark command. A bookmark creation dialog box will be displayed.

Fig. 236. HTML document. Inserting a bookmark

The selected object is not formatted now. You can use bookmarks to arrange for an internal reference as follows:

Create a link (see above); �Enter the symbol � # and a bookmark name in the Address field after you type in a hyperlink. Example: v8help://1cv8/PictInfo#Bookmark1.

4.12. lIne

Lines can help to visually organize a document.

4.13. forMattIng htMl docuMentS

To format an HTML document, you can use commands of the Formatting and Edit HTML toolbars. You can choose your own style and shift the text using the Edit HTML toolbar.You can use the Formatting toolbar to choose font options, text and background color, and to set border type and text alignment.

4.14. edItIng In htMl forMat

The features of the HTML document editor available on the Edit tab are limited. In the Text tab, the HTML developer can edit the document directly as HTML code.

4.15. vIeWIng the reSultS

To view the resulting HTML document, switch to the Preview tab and check the layout and behavior of the document objects.

Page 271: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 5

GraphICal sCheMa edItor

A graphical schema is a composition of schema items showing the structure or relationship of objects. You can use structural charts, business charts, data flow charts, and object interaction charts for drawing.Graphical schema consists of a rectangular area of the screen that, in the most general case, contains various schema items, for example, decorations, connector lines, or route points.

5.1. edItIng a ScheMa

You can edit a schema in a graphical schema field on a form or in a Graphical Schema document.Documents of this type are saved in a file with the .GRS extension.

5.2. InSertIng IteMS Into a graphIcal ScheMa

To insert an item, select its type in the Graphical Schema Elements command bar or use the appropriate command from the menu: Graphical Schema – Insert Schema Items. Next specify a rectangular area to insert the item, or the beginning and end points if you are inserting a decorative line. After an item is inserted, the insertion mode is reset as in the form editor.Every item has a rectangular selection border with markers (small squares in the corners of the rectangle and in the middle of the sides).Precise position and size settings can be configured in the Location category of the properties palette. Move or resize items using standard Microsoft Windows methods with the mouse or arrow keys.You can use the properties palette to configure an item (to set item rules, item appearance and other item properties).

Page 272: enterprise manual 1c

272 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.2.1. copying graphical Schema Items

You can paste new items by copying them from any schema (including a route map) and from any configuration.To copy, select a control or a group of controls, copy it to the clipboard and paste it into the current schema. If an item has a unique name, its name will not be changed. Otherwise the new item will be assigned a new name. When you copy an item or a group of items using the clipboard, item names that can be inserted into any text are also copied. You can copy an item or a group of items by pressing and holding the Ctrl key while dragging the item with your mouse.If you need to copy an image of part or entire graphical schema to the graphical editor object, select the required items and use the Copy command. If no item was selected before copying, the entire graphical schema is copied to the clipboard.

5.3. laYout grId

One simple technique for aligning items is aligning their borders to the marking grid. The grid consists of horizontal and vertical lines which can be used as land-marks to specify the element position and size in a graphical schema. You can specify different grid section dimensions, turn the snap to grid feature on and off and show or hide a grid.When you create a new schema, the default grid spacing (both vertical and hori-zontal) is 20 pixels and the grid is displayed in Draw Lines mode. When items are dragged and dropped, they are always aligned to the top left corner. If the size of a dragged item is not divisible by the grid spacing, it will not be resized.You can manage the marking grid in the Edit category of the graphical schema properties. If the Align to Grid option is enabled for a schema, the item layout is displayed in dots located at the crosspoints of the grid (you can use the checkered order display mode for the grid) or in lines (depending on the Grid Mode option). If the Align to Grid option is enabled, all the items will be automatically arranged along the layout lines. The size of an item will be determined automatically based on the grid spacing. When items are resized (whether with your mouse or keyboard), the edited item’s border is always placed along the grid irrespective of the fact of whether or not the other border is snapped to grid or not. You can specify the grid spacing size horizontally and vertically. To do so, enter an integer between 1 and 99 for Grid Horizontal Step or Grid Vertical Step in the schema properties. Horizontal and vertical values may differ. The following issues should be considered when selecting grid spacing. With small grid spacing, items are harder to align, and it takes more steps. However,

Page 273: enterprise manual 1c

273Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor

a large spacing tends to leave large gaps between items, which increase the size of the schema. We recommend setting a grid spacing of 20 (both vertically and horizontally) because it successfully combines a reasonable spacing between items and sufficient precision in sizing.

5.4. actIonS on Selected group of controlS

Some alignment operations, including movement and others, can be applied to a group of items.Groups are selected using the mouse in a standard manner. The location and size of the group is displayed in the status bar just as it would be for a single schema item. You can align a group of items or modify its size using special commands. These include:

alignment management �items distribution �size setting �

Uniform settings for groups of items can be specified in the properties palette (i.e. labels can be displayed with vertical or horizontal alignment, and you can specify the font size, font color, etc.).

NOTE 1

You can change or set only shared properties of items in a group.

NOTE 2

Group operations are applied to all the selected items except connector lines (since connector lines are reconstructed automatically, and users cannot manage the coordinates of their segments).

5.4.1. Managing alignment and distribution of Schema Items

Items are aligned using Graphical Schema – Alignment from the menu or using the corresponding buttons of the Align toolbar. The menu items are available (alignment is applied), whenever more than one schema item is selected.

Commands Actions

Align Left Aligns the left boundaries of the selected items. The item’s left boundaries are arranged in a straight line vertically

Align Right Aligns right boundaries

Align Top Aligns top boundaries

Page 274: enterprise manual 1c

274 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Commands Actions

ign Bottom Aligns bottom boundaries

Align Automatically Automatically aligns an element on the schema

5.4.2. distributing Schema Items

In order to ensure uniform distribution of a group of schema items, it is convenient to use commands from the Graphical Schema – Distribute submenu.

Command Actions

Distribute Vertically Evenly distributes all the items in a group between the top and bottom one

Distribute Horizontally Evenly distributes all the items in a group uniformly between the leftmost and rightmost items

The commands are available whenever two or more schema items are selected. When you execute a command, border items remain in place and all the other items are distributed so that the distance between all the selected items is the same. The items in the middle are distributed without being snapped to the grid, even if snap to grid mode is enabled.

5.4.3. Setting Sizes

The commands of the Graphical Schema – Size submenu are used to set all the items in a group to identical dimensions. Note that the template used will be the item marked with white squares. This item is referred to as the master item (the top item on the figure). Other items have the black squares as their markers.

Fig. 237. Setting sizes for items

The master in a selected control group is changed by clicking another item.

Command Actions

Same Width Sets an identical width for all the items in the group

Same Height Sets an identical height for all the items in the group

Same Size Sets identical size for all the items in the group

Page 275: enterprise manual 1c

275Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor

The effect of the Same Width command for different item masters is illustrated by the figure below (in the example 1, the upper item is the master; in the example 2 it is the lower item).

Fig. 238. Effect of Same Width command

5.4.4. order of Items

When items overlap, one item completely or partially covers another item. The Graphical Schema – Order menu item is used to set the order of items.

Command Actions

Move Up Moves the selected item forward one layer

Move Down Moves the selected item backward one layer

Bring to Front Moves the selected item to the front of all other objects

Send to Back Moves the selected item behind all other objects

These actions are applied both to one item and to a group of items.

5.4.5. Scale

For more convenient viewing of the entire graphical schema, you can use Graphical Schema – Scale (or scroll with your mouse while holding the Ctrl key) to change scale.

5.4.6. Scrolling a graphical Schema

For convenient scrolling of a large schema, you can press the mouse scroll wheel and select the scrolling direction with your cursor. The scrolling speed depends on the distance between the current cursor location and the location where the mouse wheel was pressed (specifically designated).

5.4.7. print and print preview

You can print and preview a graphical schema while editing using the File – Print or File – Print preview commands. Use the File – Page Setup menu item to configure the print settings, which generally are standard for all the Windows applications.

Page 276: enterprise manual 1c

276 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Black and white – defines if the graphical schema should be printed and previewed in black-and-white.Scale – you can use this option to specify the scale mode. Available scale modes:

Auto � – no rescale (default mode).By page width � – proportional scale by page width. If the graphical schema width (the coordinate of the rightmost item) is larger than the page width, the graphical schema is proportionally scaled (the X and Y coordinates are proportionally adjusted) so that the schema width can fit on the page.Proportionally � – the proportional scale mode. If the graphical schema height (the lowest coordinate of the bottom item) or width is greater than the page height or width, the graphical schema is proportionally scaled (the X and Y coordinates are proportionally adjusted) so that the entire schema can fit on one page.

5.5. graphIcal ScheMa propertIeS

5.5.1. appearance property category

The properties of the Appearance category specify the format of the entire graphical schema.The Background Color property defines the graphical schema background color.

5.5.2. edit property category

Align to Grid – use the grid and snap items to the grid.Grid Horizontal Step – horizontal spacing of the grid.Grid Vertical Step – vertical spacing of the grid.Draw Grid Mode – grid lines view mode (Draw Lines, Draw Points, Draw Checkerboard, Do Not Draw Grid).

5.6. graphIcal ScheMa IteMS

This section describes all the graphical schema item types in alphabetical order.The elements behavior is configured in the properties palette by defining and selecting values. Some item properties are shared by all or most items. A complete description of the properties for each item can be found in the manual "1C:Enterprise 8.2. 1C:Enterprise Script Description".Shared Graphical Schema Item propertiesThere are many properties that are shared by all or most item types. Usually these properties have a common purpose and are edited in a uniform manner. Below you will find a description of these properties. For more information on editing

Page 277: enterprise manual 1c

277Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor

the unique properties of some items, see the sections dedicated to individual item types.For descriptive convenience, the property settings will be grouped by category as they are in the properties palette.Some properties that are described below can be unavailable for specific items.

5.6.1. Main property category

Name – item name. The tools of the 1C:Enterprise script address graphical schema items by their names. Description – item description (a multilanguage string that is displayed within an area containing the item or over the connector line).

5.6.2. appearance property category

You can use the properties of this category to configure route map appearance (text color, tooltip texts and other parameters).Background color – specifies the color of the item background. The color is selected from the color palette or from preset styles.Border Color – the color of the border around the item.Text Color – the color of the text in the item. Font – item text font. Defines the type, size, and effects for the font or selects it from preset styles.An item (except the connector lines) can contain a picture (Picture property). You can use the Picture position property to configure the picture position as related to the main contents of the item. Use the Picture size property to specify the picture size as related to the item size.All the items except for the connector lines have the following properties:

Border � – a frame that surrounds an item. Transparent background � – if you enable this property, the item will be displayed on a transparent background.

5.6.3. characteristics property category

Horizontal position – selects horizontal text alignment.Vertical position – selects vertical text alignment.Tooltip – a hint that will be displayed to describe the item purpose.

Page 278: enterprise manual 1c

278 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.6.4. location property category

The properties of this category allow you to position an item in a schema. All the items except the lines have the following properties:

Left � – position of the left border of the item.Top � – position of the top border of the item.Width � – item width.Height � – item height.

5.6.5. decorative line

The Decorative Line graphical schema item is designed for drawing lines and arrows and for connecting various items. The Decorative Line item is automatically redrawn when the relative positions of the items it joins change. The user cannot intervene in the drawing algorithm, except for manual movement of medial points on the line. If you reposition medial points manually, they are remembered, and where possible they are taken into account in subsequent automatic redrawings of the line. When the system creates a connector line, it tries to create the shortest path consisting of vertical and horizontal line sections that do not cross other schema items.Medial points of decorative lines can be strictly vertical or strictly horizontal. Bends on a decorative line are rounded, which permits the directions or intersections of lines to be retained.Automatic drawing is used only for the lines that connect two schema items.The direction of an arrow when a decorative line is inserted is determined by the ratio of the sides of the rectangle selected when it is inserted: if the height is greater than the width, the vertical direction is selected, otherwise the horizontal direction is applied. You can divide decorative lines into segments without regard for the alignment grid.

5.6.6. appearance property category

Line – type and thickness of the line that is used to draw sections of the Connector Line item. Line Color – color of the sections of the Connector Line item.Beginning arrow, ending arrow – the arrow style at the beginning and in the end of the line (no arrow, filled arrow, or open arrow).

Page 279: enterprise manual 1c

279Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor

5.6.7. characteristics property category

Text position – position of the text as related to the line; in the first segment, the text is drawn over the first segment of the line or in the middle of the line (in the middle of the sum of all the segments of a line).

5.6.8. decoration

The Decoration graphical schema item is designed to display figures with text and/or pictures. The feature of drawing a decoration with the Transparent Background property enabled is that the graphical schema grid and underlying schema items will be drawn over it in the transparent areas of the decoration.

5.6.9. appearance property category

Shape – the type of the figure being drawn from the predefined types:No �Block �Folder �File �Right Arrow �Left Arrow �Up Arrow �Down Arrow �Left-right Arrow �Up-down Arrow �Document �Vertical parentheses �Horizontal parentheses �Ellipse �

Depending on the figure type selected, the text and picture area changes. For example, in a decoration with a Right Arrow type figure, the text and picture area is bounded by the rectangular base of the arrow.

5.6.10. point of action

An Action type graphical schema item depicts a point of a business process for which tasks are assigned and performed.

Page 280: enterprise manual 1c

280 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

5.6.11. addressing property category

Explanation – a string that contains characteristics of the point of action. Group – if this option is set to True, the tasks for this business process point will be issued to all the group (department) members. Otherwise, one task is assigned to the entire group, e.g. Sales Department. Only one person will execute this task (the one who first undertakes it).Addressing properties – the number of these properties equals the number of addressing attributes for a task selected in the Task property of the current business process. You can use the properties palette to select one of the predefined values of the type specified in the addressing attribute of the task (e.g. from the Departments or Workers lists).

5.6.12. fork point

The Fork item of a graphical schema contains a business process point where the work flow splits into several parallel flows. By default, it is placed on a schema with three outgoing connecting lines. Use the Add Outgoing Connector Line command from the context menu to add an outgoing line to this item. To delete an outgoing line, select it and use the Delete command from the menu. You cannot delete the only remaining outgoing line.

5.6.13. condition point

The Condition graphical schema item is a business process point that has two possible exit points depending on the logical condition. By default, Condition item is inserted into a graphical schema with two outgoing connector lines (from the left side and from the right side). The right branch includes the Yes comment while the left one is labeled No. You can swap the condi-tion branches. To do so, drag a rectangle at the beginning of the Condition line and move it to the opposite side of the Condition item.

5.6.14. end point

The End graphical schema item the end point of a business process.

5.6.15. Start point

The Start graphical schema item contains a business process start point.

5.6.16. joining point

The Join graphical schema item of a route map contains a business process point where all the parallel paths going out of the Fork point join.

Page 281: enterprise manual 1c

281Appendix 5. Graphical Schema Editor

5.6.17. embedded Business process point

The Subprocess graphical schema item contains a business process point that executes an embedded business process.

5.6.18. processing point

The Data Processor graphical schema item depicts a business process point to be performed automatically.

5.6.19. transition choice point

The Transition choice graphical schema item depicts a point of a business process having several outcomes or options, from which only one is selected. Use the Add Transition command from the context menu to add a transition. Use the Remove Transition command from the context menu to delete selected transition. You cannot move transitions. By default, the Transition choice item is inserted into a graphical schema with three transitions. Each transition has an outgoing connector line. You cannot delete this line, but you can move it to the opposite side of the transition area. When you delete a transition, its outgoing connector line is also deleted. When you add a transition, an outgoing connector line is added to it.

5.6.20. transition property category

Name – transition name. The transition name is used by the 1C:Enterprise script to call a transition in the SwitchProcessing handler. Description – transition description (a string that is displayed within the Transition choice item area).Background color – specifies the color of the item background. This color is used to fill in the area inside the Transition choice item that contains a transition.

Page 282: enterprise manual 1c

282 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Page 283: enterprise manual 1c

appendIx 6

GeoGraphICal sCheMa edItor

A geographical schema is a set of topographic data that describe geographic features, and free-form data related to the geographic features, and these data can be grouped into logical series.

Fig. 239. Geographical schema

A geographical schema can be used independently (in a Geographical schema docu-ment) or placed within a spreadsheet document. In the latter case, an area of data depicted on the geographical schema can be allocated for it in the spreadsheet docu-

Page 284: enterprise manual 1c

284 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

ment. A geographical schema may also be located within a form. In the latter case, the source data is customized and prepared during configuration development.A geographical schema contains geographic objects, which are usually grouped by type or by several attributes using layers. Layer – a set of geographic objects grouped by some attribute. For example, the Rivers layer contains objects describing the geometry of rivers in the region, and the Districts layer contains a description of a city’s districts.Layer object – an elementary object describing topological data of a specific geographic feature. For example, an object can describe the contours of a region. Objects are divided into the following classes:

Point object � – represents a feature that can be represented as a point. For example, cities can be represented as point objects on a large-scale map.Multipoint object � – an object that can be represented by multiple points. For example, cities in a region can be grouped by population, and each such group represented with such an object. Polyline object � – an object that can be represented as a line. For example, such objects on a map can represent rivers or highways. Polygonal object � – an object that defines some area. For example, Vladimir Region can be represented by a polygonal object on a geographical schema.

Series – free-form data grouped by some attribute. An example of such a series could be annual sales by region.Series value – the value of a data series associated with a specific feature. For example, for the data series Annual sales by city, the value of the data series will be the sales for a particular city for a particular year.Shapefile – a file of topological data created using software of the ESRI ArcGIS family. Can contain data linked to topological features. Each file contains one layer. A geographical schema permits such files to be read as layers.

Warning!

1C:Enterprise does not provide tools for creating shape files.

A geographical schema consists of a rectangular area of the screen that contains a plot area, a title, and legends. The areas can be moved, resized, their properties can be modified, or the areas can simply be hidden (except the plot area). When a geographical schema is resized, the areas resize proportionally.Plot Area – contains a coordinate space and depicts data. Title Area – carries an information load and depicts a free-form title.Legend Area – an auxiliary area that depicts the symbol key, helping to understand the data depicted in the plot area.

Page 285: enterprise manual 1c

285Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor

6.1. creatIng a geographIcal ScheMa

To create a geographical schema, select File – New from the menu, and in the dialog that opens, select the document type Geographical schema.To place a geographical schema in a spreadsheet document, select Table – Picture – Geographical schema from the menu.

6.2. SavIng a geographIcal ScheMa

To save a geographical schema, select File – Save from the menu. In the dialog that opens, select a directory and specify a name for the file.Documents of the Geographical schema type are saved in a file with the .GEO extension.

6.3. cuStoMIzIng a geographIcal ScheMa

The customization task consists of defining the topologic features to which analyzed data will be linked, the formats specific to various areas, and their dimensions and positions.If a geographical schema is located within a spreadsheet document, you can load the Geographical schema document existing on disk using the Read command from the properties palette.To clear, use the Clear link.To manage layers of a geographical schema, use the Settings link. The layer settings window will be displayed.

Fig. 240. Geographical schema. Layer settings

Page 286: enterprise manual 1c

286 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Use the buttons on the toolbar to add, edit, and delete layers. When you add a layer, a layer selection dialog opens first, and then a layer import parameter window (on the drawing).In the window, specify the name under which the layer will be imported into the schema, what data series should be imported and under what name, and how they will be displayed. Each topological object on a geographical schema has a special property, Value, which is designed for storing free-form data, and in the general case, permits easy identification of features.In the Layer Import Options window, use the values of some data series to populate the values of each object. To import values, check Fill Value Property of Layer Objects and specify the series to import from. Once you have selected the layers, you can begin customizing them.Layer settings include:

Text � – free-form text describing the layer.Data source organization � – defines the organization of the data source, if such a source is used. For details, see the section describing the peculiarities of working with spreadsheet documents.Visibility � – defines the layer visibility on the schema.Enable selection � – defines the possibility of interactive selection of objects on the schema.Scale Range Beginning � – defines the beginning of the scale range within which the layer will be visible on the schema.Scale Range End � – defines the end of the scale range within which the layer will be visible on the schema.

Series settings include:Text � – free-form text describing the series.Format � – the data display format.Display Type � – the series display type. Series values may be:

hidden ○displayed as text ○displayed as a histogram ○displayed as circles whose size depends on the value ○displayed as circles whose color depends on the value ○displayed as circles whose hue depends on the value ○displayed as a pie chart ○displayed as a picture ○

Page 287: enterprise manual 1c

287Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor

Base color � – the color depending on which the series will be displayed in Histogram mode, sized-circle, hued-circle, or pie-chart mode.Text color � – the color in which text data will be displayed.Text font � – the font in which text data will be displayed.Text orientation � – the text rotation angle.

Settings for point and multipoint objects:Object drawing type � – as marker, specified character, or picture.Color � – the color in which the marker or character are displayed.Marker � – the marker used.Font � – the font in which the character will be displayed.Symbol � – the symbol displayed.Picture � – the picture displayed.Base point � – the point in the picture that will be taken as the origin for display.

polyline object settings include:Color � – the color in which the line will be displayed.Line type � – the type of line in which the line will be displayed.

polygonal object settings include:Color � – the fill color.Border color � – the color in which the polygon’s border will be displayed.

6.3.1. Legend elements setup

To customize legend elements, select the legend area and click Settings in the prop-erties palette. The following dialog will open:

Fig. 241. Legend element setup in geographical schema

Page 288: enterprise manual 1c

288 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

You can manage elements using command bar buttons. If you add an element, a list of layers is displayed first, and after you select a layer, a list of series is displayed.Select the desired series and specify its settings.

6.3.2. object properties

After you have imported layers into a document, you can customize the proper-ties of individual objects. To do so, double-click the object. The object properties window is displayed.

Fig. 242. Main properties of a geographical schema object

On the Main tab, specify the object’s basic properties. The Data tab contains a list of series, their drawing types, and their identifying values.

Fig. 243. Data of a geographical schema object

Page 289: enterprise manual 1c

289Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor

The Appearance tab allows you to select the element’s formatting.

Fig. 244. Formatting of a Geographical Schema object

6.4. geographIcal ScheMa propertIeS

6.4.1. appearance property category

Transparent Background – sets background transparency.Background Color – sets the background color of the geographical schema.Scale – this property allows you to set the scale mode depending on which data will be displayed. Available options:

All Data � – the data are scaled so they fit entirely within the visible area.As Scale Defined � – data are scaled according to scale.Specified Area � – only the coordinate-specified area.Scale � – the scale for data to be displayed in As Scale Defined mode.Projection � – the geographic projection in which the geographical schema will be displayed.Latitude Offset � – the latitudinal amount in degrees by which the coordinate origin will be offset.Longitude Offset � – the longitudinal amount in degrees by which the coordinate origin will be offset.Show Coordinates � – if enabled, the coordinates of the point under the mouse pointer will be displayed in the status bar. This property is not available for some projection types.Left � – the left border of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale mode is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree.Bottom � – the bottom edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale mode is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree.

Page 290: enterprise manual 1c

290 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Right � – the right edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale mode is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree. Top � – the top edge of the specified area. Available if Specified Area scale mode is selected. Specified in tenths of a degree. Title � – shows or hides the title area. Available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet document or a form.Legend � – shows or hides the legend area. Available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet or form.

6.4.2. Series property category

This category of properties is available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet. The properties in the category allow you to set the data source for the layer;Active Layer – specifies the layer for which the data source will be customized.Content Type – specifies the data source organization type. Two data placement options are possible: in rows and at intersections.

Object 1 Data Series 1 Value 1Object 2 Data Series 2 Value 2Object 3 Data Series 3 Value 3Object 4 Data Series 4 Value 4Object 5 Data Series 5 Value 5

Series 1 Series 2 Series 3 Series 4Object 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 1 Value 1Object 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2 Value 2Object 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3 Value 3Object 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4 Value 4

Data Range – the range of data in the spreadsheet document that will be used as a data source (similar to a chart).

6.5. geographIcal ScheMa tItle propertIeS

These properties are available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet document.

6.5.1. appearance property category

Text – text to display in the title.Font – title text font.

Page 291: enterprise manual 1c

291Appendix 6. Geographical Schema Editor

Title Color – the color of the title text.Alignment – defines the alignment of the title text.Border – the type of border around the title area.Border Color – the color of the border around the title area.Transparent Background – defines the background transparency of the title area.Background Color – the color of the title area background.

6.6. geographIcal ScheMa legend propertIeS

These properties are available if the geographical schema is located in a spreadsheet document.

6.6.1. appearance property category

Font – legend text font.Color – the color of the legend text.Border – the type of the border around the legend area.Border Color – the color of the border around the legend area.Transparent Background – defines background transparency of the legend area.Background Color – the color of the legend area background.Scale Line – shows or hides the scale line in the legend area.Legend Elements – the Settings link opens the Legend Elements dialog that is used to customize the legend elements.

Fig. 245. Legend element setup dialog in geographical schema

Data Series – the series of data linked to the legend element. To add a series, click the Add button on the toolbar, select the layer, and then select the series. Picture – a picture that helps decipher a legend element.Sample Text – text as displayed on the schema.Sample Font – sample text font.

Page 292: enterprise manual 1c

292 1C:Enterprise 8.2. User Manual

Sample Color – sample text color.Label Text – the text of an explanatory label.If a legend element is linked to a data series and the sample text is not specified, text from the data series will be displayed.

6.7. text Search and replace

All the text properties (Text, Format, Label Text, Sample Text, Title) and text values of the objects support text search and replace (see "Search and Replace" on the page 226). To view and edit the object values, use the Object Properties command in the context menu of the geographical schema object.